Altus Monitor

Mode
Communications

Document 302219
Revision P

March, 2006

Notice
Kinemetrics Inc. reserves the right to make improvements in the software described in this documentation at any time and without
notice. The information contained here is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by
Kinemetrics Inc.
The software described in this document is provided as a licensed item, in conjunction with Kinemetrics equipment. It may not be
copied or distributed for use on other than the equipment it was licensed for.
Disclaimer
Kinemetrics Inc. shall have no liability or responsibility to you or any other person or entity with respect to any liability, loss or
damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by this documentation or the software described in it. This includes but is
not limited to any interruption of service, loss of business or anticipatory profits or consequential damages resulting from the use or
operation of such software or computer programs.
Warranty
Software and software updates provided by Kinemetrics Inc. for its Strong Motion and Seismological measurement and recording
equipment have a warranty period of one year. This warranty applies to the standard software package as well as to options or special
software provided to the customer. An update shipped under warranty will be covered by the original systems warranty for the
balance of the one year period.
Warranty claims shall be made on Software Change Request forms (SCRs). Problems reported by filing an SCR within one year will
be corrected free of charge. SCRs filed after the one year period will be billed at the then-current rates.
The method of correction will be at Kinemetrics Inc.s discretion, in that a correction may be supplied via a software patch, or by
shipping updated software.
Shipment of updated software will sometimes require hardware or configuration changes to the system. Hardware changes may
include, but are not limited to, memory and disk drives. Required hardware or configuration changes are not included in the cost of a
software update, and may represent an additional cost to the customer.
All software, once delivered, is covered under warranty. Updates fitting the following descriptions would NOT be considered valid
warranty claims, and the software would be billed accordingly:

Updates not prompted by a software problem.

Additional software options requested voluntarily by the customer, such as the addition of special software.
Copyright 1998-2006, Kinemetrics Inc.
All Rights Reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced without the written permission of Kinemetrics Inc.

Table of Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 1
Mode of Communication............................................................................................................................ 1
Use of Modems .......................................................................................................................................... 1
External Modems........................................................................................................................................ 3
Internal Modems......................................................................................................................................... 3
Network Option Board ............................................................................................................................... 4
ISDN Terminal Adapters ("Modems") ....................................................................................................... 4
Pager Call Out ............................................................................................................................................ 5
Short Message Services.............................................................................................................................. 5
FTP ........................................................................................................................................................... 10
2. The Terminal Window - Monitor Mode ............................................................................................... 15
The Terminal Window - Monitor Mode................................................................................................... 15
3. The Main Commands in Monitor Mode............................................................................................... 17
The Main Commands ............................................................................................................................... 17
*\\\<cr>................................................................................................................................................. 17
A:, B: .................................................................................................................................................... 17
ALARM ALARM n.............................................................................................................................. 17
ALARM DURATION s........................................................................................................................ 17
ALARM OFF....................................................................................................................................... 17
ALARM SOH n.................................................................................................................................... 17
ANSWERMODE ................................................................................................................................. 17
AQ ON/OFF ........................................................................................................................................ 17
AQ AUTO_DELETE n........................................................................................................................ 17
AQ CLEAR_EVENT_COUNTER n ................................................................................................... 18
AQ DEBUG ......................................................................................................................................... 18
AQ DIAGNOSTICS............................................................................................................................. 18
AQ DISABLE_LED n ......................................................................................................................... 18
AQ DVM .............................................................................................................................................. 18
AQ FILE .............................................................................................................................................. 18
AQ FT .................................................................................................................................................. 18
AQ PEAK ............................................................................................................................................. 18
AQ SRT ................................................................................................................................................ 18
AQ TRIGGER...................................................................................................................................... 18
AQ DETRIGGER ................................................................................................................................ 18
AUTOBAUD n..................................................................................................................................... 18
BAUDRATE r ...................................................................................................................................... 19
BLOCKMODE..................................................................................................................................... 19
CALLMODE........................................................................................................................................ 19
CD p, CHDIR p.................................................................................................................................... 19
CLEAR ALARM .................................................................................................................................. 19
CLEAR ALL_LEDS ............................................................................................................................ 19
CLEAR EVENT_LED......................................................................................................................... 19
COPY sf df ........................................................................................................................................... 19
DEL p ................................................................................................................................................... 19
DG ........................................................................................................................................................ 19
DIR p.................................................................................................................................................... 19
DISPLAY BITMAP ............................................................................................................................. 19
DISPLAY CHANNEL ......................................................................................................................... 20
DISPLAY MODEM............................................................................................................................. 20
DISPLAY RWMISC ............................................................................................................................ 20
DISPLAY SENSOR............................................................................................................................. 20
DISPLAY SERIAL_DATA_STREAM................................................................................................ 20
DISPLAY STREAM ............................................................................................................................ 20

DISPLAY WRITE file ......................................................................................................................... 20

EDIT .................................................................................................................................................... 20
ERASE p .............................................................................................................................................. 20
FORMAT d .......................................................................................................................................... 20
HELP ................................................................................................................................................... 20
MD p, MKDIR p .................................................................................................................................. 20
NET p ................................................................................................................................................... 20
PASSWORD w..................................................................................................................................... 20
PW w .................................................................................................................................................... 21
PASSWORD NEW w........................................................................................................................... 21
RELEASE ............................................................................................................................................ 21
RENAME ofn nfn................................................................................................................................ 21
RD p, RMDIR p ................................................................................................................................... 21
RX fn .................................................................................................................................................... 21
STATUS ............................................................................................................................................... 21
SUMMARY .......................................................................................................................................... 21
SYSTEM LOAD................................................................................................................................... 21
SYSTEM LOG xx ................................................................................................................................ 21
SYSTEM RESET................................................................................................................................. 21
TIME y,m,d,h,m,s ................................................................................................................................ 21
TX fn [H] [K] [T] [channel list] .......................................................................................................... 22
VERSION ............................................................................................................................................ 22
WIPEDISK d ....................................................................................................................................... 22
The Main Commands - Detailed Description ........................................................................................... 23
A:, B: .................................................................................................................................................... 23
ALARM ALARM n.............................................................................................................................. 23
ALARM DURATION s........................................................................................................................ 24
ALARM OFF....................................................................................................................................... 24
ALARM SOH n.................................................................................................................................... 24
ANSWERMODE ................................................................................................................................. 25
AQ ........................................................................................................................................................ 26
AQ ON/OFF ........................................................................................................................................ 26
AQ AUTO_DELETE n........................................................................................................................ 27
AQ CLEAR_EVENT_COUNTER n ................................................................................................... 28
AQ DEBUG ......................................................................................................................................... 29
AQ DIAGNOSTICS............................................................................................................................. 29
AQ DISABLE_LED n ......................................................................................................................... 30
AQ DVM .............................................................................................................................................. 31
AQ FILE .............................................................................................................................................. 33
AQ FT .................................................................................................................................................. 33
AQ PEAK [x] ....................................................................................................................................... 37
AQ SRT ................................................................................................................................................ 38
AQ TRIGGER...................................................................................................................................... 42
AQ DETRIGGER ................................................................................................................................ 42
AUTOBAUD n..................................................................................................................................... 42
BAUDRATE r ...................................................................................................................................... 43
BLOCKMODE..................................................................................................................................... 44
CALLMODE........................................................................................................................................ 44
CD p, CHDIR p.................................................................................................................................... 45
CLEAR ALARM .................................................................................................................................. 45
CLEAR ALL_LEDS ............................................................................................................................ 45
CLEAR EVENT_LED......................................................................................................................... 45
COPY sf df ........................................................................................................................................... 46
DEL p ................................................................................................................................................... 46
DG ........................................................................................................................................................ 46
DIR p.................................................................................................................................................... 46

ii

DISPLAY BITMAP ............................................................................................................................. 47

DISPLAY CHANNEL ......................................................................................................................... 48
DISPLAY MODEM............................................................................................................................. 48
DISPLAY RWMISC ............................................................................................................................ 49
DISPLAY SENSOR............................................................................................................................. 49
DISPLAY SERIAL_DATA_STREAM................................................................................................ 50
DISPLAY STREAM ............................................................................................................................ 50
DISPLAY WRITE file ......................................................................................................................... 51
EDIT .................................................................................................................................................... 53
ERASE p .............................................................................................................................................. 53
FORMAT d .......................................................................................................................................... 53
HELP ................................................................................................................................................... 54
MD p, MKDIR p .................................................................................................................................. 54
NET p ................................................................................................................................................... 55
PASSWORD w, PW p .......................................................................................................................... 55
RELEASE ............................................................................................................................................ 56
RENAME ofn nfn................................................................................................................................ 56
RD p, RMDIR p ................................................................................................................................... 56
RX fn .................................................................................................................................................... 57
STATUS ............................................................................................................................................... 57
SUMMARY [p] [x]............................................................................................................................... 58
SYSTEM LOAD................................................................................................................................... 61
SYSTEM LOG ..................................................................................................................................... 62
SYSTEM RESET................................................................................................................................. 64
TIME y,m,d,h,mn,s.............................................................................................................................. 65
TX fn [H] [K] [T] [channel list] .......................................................................................................... 65
VERSION ............................................................................................................................................ 66
WIPEDISK d ....................................................................................................................................... 67
4. The Parameter Editor ............................................................................................................................ 69
Saving and Loading Parameters ............................................................................................................... 70
Default Commands................................................................................................................................... 71
DEFAULT ........................................................................................................................................... 71
DEFAULT FACTORY ........................................................................................................................ 71
Operating Parameters - General - User Settable....................................................................................... 71
ABORT................................................................................................................................................. 71
BITMAP c1 c2 .. cn ............................................................................................................................. 71
BUF256 x............................................................................................................................................. 71
CELLULAR DURATION mmm ......................................................................................................... 71
CELLULAR ON n hh mm................................................................................................................... 71
CELLULAR POWER_CONTROL mmm ........................................................................................... 72
CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL tr im ......................................................................................... 72
CELLULAR WARMUP sss................................................................................................................. 72
HELP ................................................................................................................................................... 72
IRIG_TYPE ......................................................................................................................................... 72
NCHANNELS n .................................................................................................................................. 72
SDSTREAMS BITMAP c1 c2 ..c6 ...................................................................................................... 72
SDSTREAMS BUFFER_SIZE n ....................................................................................................... 72
SDSTREAMS FORMAT n.................................................................................................................. 72
SDSTREAMS SAMPLE_RATE n ...................................................................................................... 72
SDSTREAMS TIMEOUT n ................................................................................................................ 72
STREAM APW s.................................................................................................................................. 72
STREAM FILTER n ........................................................................................................................... 73
STREAM FT....................................................................................................................................... 73
STREAM MINRUNTIME s................................................................................................................ 73
STREAM PREEVENT s ..................................................................................................................... 73
STREAM POSTEVENT s ................................................................................................................... 73

iii

STREAM SPS n................................................................................................................................... 73

STREAM STORAGE pd sd ................................................................................................................. 73
STREAM THRESHOLD tn dn ........................................................................................................... 73
STREAM VOTERS x v [x v] ............................................................................................................... 73
Operating Parameters - Channel Specific - User Settable - Each channel's parameters are set separately.
ch = channel#............................................................................................................................................ 73
CHANNEL ALARM ch n.nn (n.nn n.nn) .......................................................................................... 73
CHANNEL CALIBRATION ch fs s nf d ............................................................................................ 73
CHANNEL FILTER ch n ................................................................................................................... 73
CHANNEL FIXED_TYPES x ............................................................................................................ 74
CHANNEL GAIN ch g........................................................................................................................ 74
CHANNEL ID ch cs ............................................................................................................................ 74
CHANNEL LOCATION ch n e u al az............................................................................................... 74
CHANNEL LTA ch n .......................................................................................................................... 74
CHANNEL MAP g ch1 ch2 ch3 ......................................................................................................... 74
CHANNEL RATIOS ch tr dt............................................................................................................... 74
CHANNEL SENSOR ch ty sn (cc rc sg)............................................................................................. 75
CHANNEL STA ch n .......................................................................................................................... 75
CHANNEL THRESHOLD ch tt td ..................................................................................................... 75
CHANNEL TRIGGER_TYPE ch n .................................................................................................... 75
Sensor Type and Sensitivity Determination ............................................................................................. 76
Operating Parameters - Digital Field Station Port .................................................................................... 77
DFS BAUDRATE cd ........................................................................................................................... 78
DFS DECIMATION cd....................................................................................................................... 78
DFS PROTOCOL cd ........................................................................................................................... 78
DFS SET c1 c2 .. cn ............................................................................................................................ 78
Operating Parameters -System Timing - Global Positioning System, GPS............................................. 78
GPS mp mm cc..................................................................................................................................... 78
UTCOFFSET n ................................................................................................................................... 78
Operating Parameters - Modem................................................................................................................ 78
MODEM ACKNOWLEDGMENT cs.................................................................................................. 78
MODEM ANSWER ............................................................................................................................. 79
MODEM AUTOCALL......................................................................................................................... 79
MODEM CALLOUT_MSG cs ............................................................................................................ 79
MODEM CHECKIN_TIME hh mm dd.............................................................................................. 79
MODEM COMPLETE_CALL x (0=off, 1=on). [0]. .......................................................................... 79
MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE n ........................................................................................................... 79
MODEM HANGUP cs ........................................................................................................................ 79
MODEM INIT cs................................................................................................................................. 79
MODEM MAXDIAL n ........................................................................................................................ 79
MODEM PAUSE s .............................................................................................................................. 80
MODEM PHONENUMBER i n ......................................................................................................... 80
MODEM PREFIX cs........................................................................................................................... 80
MODEM SUFFIX cs........................................................................................................................... 80
MODEM WAIT s................................................................................................................................. 80
Non-Operating Parameters - User Settable............................................................................................... 80
COMMENT cs ..................................................................................................................................... 80
LOCATION la lo el.............................................................................................................................. 80
SERIALNUMBER n ........................................................................................................................... 80
STNID cs.............................................................................................................................................. 80
SITEID cs ............................................................................................................................................ 80
USERCODE n v................................................................................................................................... 80
Other Header Values controlled by the Instrument Firmware.................................................................. 81
Other header variables that have meaning only within the context of an event header ............................ 81
STA/LTA Triggering................................................................................................................................ 82
Parameter Commands - Detailed Descriptions......................................................................................... 83

iv

ABORT................................................................................................................................................. 83
BITMAP c1 c2 .. cn ............................................................................................................................. 83
BUF256 x............................................................................................................................................. 84
CELLULAR DURATION mmm ......................................................................................................... 85
CELLULAR ON n hh mm................................................................................................................... 86
CELLULAR POWER_CONTROL mmm ........................................................................................... 87
CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL tr im ......................................................................................... 87
CELLULAR WARMUP sss................................................................................................................. 89
CHANNEL ALARM ch n.nn (n.nn n.nn) .......................................................................................... 89
CHANNEL CALIBRATION ch fs s nf d ............................................................................................ 90
CHANNEL FILTER ch n ................................................................................................................... 91
CHANNEL FIXED_TYPES x ............................................................................................................ 92
CHANNEL GAIN ch g........................................................................................................................ 93
CHANNEL ID ch cs ............................................................................................................................ 94
CHANNEL LOCATION ch n e u al az............................................................................................... 94
CHANNEL LTA ch n .......................................................................................................................... 95
CHANNEL MAP g ch1 ch2 ch3 ......................................................................................................... 96
CHANNEL RATIOS ch tr dt............................................................................................................... 99
CHANNEL SENSOR ch ty sn (cc rc sg)........................................................................................... 100
CHANNEL STA ch n ........................................................................................................................ 103
CHANNEL THRESHOLD ch tt dt ................................................................................................... 104
CHANNEL TRIGGER_TYPE ch n .................................................................................................. 105
COMMENT cs ................................................................................................................................... 106
DEFAULT ......................................................................................................................................... 106
DEFAULT FACTORY ...................................................................................................................... 107
DFS BAUDRATE cd ......................................................................................................................... 108
DFS DECIMATION cd..................................................................................................................... 108
DFS PROTOCOL cd ......................................................................................................................... 109
DFS SET c1 c2 .. cn .......................................................................................................................... 109
GPS mp mm cc................................................................................................................................... 110
HELP ................................................................................................................................................. 110
IRIG-TYPE cd ................................................................................................................................... 111
LOCATION la lo el............................................................................................................................ 111
MODEM ANSWER ........................................................................................................................... 112
MODEM AUTOCALL....................................................................................................................... 113
MODEM CALLOUT_MESSAGE cs ................................................................................................ 114
MODEM CHECKIN_TIME hh mm dd (hh=0-23 (-1=OFF), mm=0-59, dd=0-15)........................ 115
MODEM COMPLETE_CALL x (0=off, 1=on). [0]. ........................................................................ 115
MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE n ......................................................................................................... 116
MODEM HANGUP cs ...................................................................................................................... 117
MODEM INIT cs............................................................................................................................... 118
MODEM MAXDIAL n ...................................................................................................................... 118
MODEM PAUSE n ........................................................................................................................... 119
MODEM PHONENUMBER i n ....................................................................................................... 119
MODEM PREFIX cs......................................................................................................................... 120
MODEM SUFFIX cs......................................................................................................................... 120
MODEM WAIT s............................................................................................................................... 121
NCHANNELS n ................................................................................................................................ 121
SDSTREAMS BITMAP c1 c2 .. c6 ................................................................................................... 122
SDSTREAMS BUFFER_SIZE n ..................................................................................................... 122
SDSTREAMS FORMAT n................................................................................................................ 123
SDSTREAMS SAMPLE_RATE n .................................................................................................... 123
SDSTREAMS TIMEOUT n .............................................................................................................. 124
SERIALNUMBER n ......................................................................................................................... 124
SITEID cs .......................................................................................................................................... 125
STNID cs............................................................................................................................................ 125

STREAM APW s................................................................................................................................ 126

STREAM FILTER n ......................................................................................................................... 126
STREAM FT st .................................................................................................................................. 127
STREAM PREEVENT s ................................................................................................................... 127
STREAM POSTEVENT s ................................................................................................................. 128
STREAM MINRUNTIME s.............................................................................................................. 128
STREAM SPS n................................................................................................................................. 129
STREAM STORAGE pd sd ............................................................................................................... 129
STREAM THRESHOLD tn dn ......................................................................................................... 130
STREAM VOTERS x v [x v] ............................................................................................................. 131
USERCODE n v................................................................................................................................. 133
UTCOFFSET n ................................................................................................................................. 133
Other Header Values that can only be displayed.................................................................................... 134
5. The Diagnostic Commands - Monitor Mode...................................................................................... 139
The Diagnostic Commands .................................................................................................................... 139
ABORT............................................................................................................................................... 139
ADC.................................................................................................................................................... 139
ALARM ON/OFF/n........................................................................................................................... 139
BAT n ................................................................................................................................................. 139
CAL .................................................................................................................................................... 139
DAC n................................................................................................................................................. 139
DUMP a b .......................................................................................................................................... 140
DVM................................................................................................................................................... 140
EEPROM ........................................................................................................................................... 140
EPISENSOR GAIN........................................................................................................................... 140
EPISENSOR RANGE ....................................................................................................................... 140
FORMAT ........................................................................................................................................... 140
GPIN .................................................................................................................................................. 140
GPOUT h ........................................................................................................................................... 140
GPS AVERAGING n......................................................................................................................... 140
GPS CLEAR n ................................................................................................................................... 140
GPS DEFAULT................................................................................................................................. 140
GPS DIAGNOSTICS......................................................................................................................... 140
GPS ON.............................................................................................................................................. 140
GPS OFF ........................................................................................................................................... 140
GPS PARAMETERS mod ang sig msk sw ....................................................................................... 141
GPS PULSE_COUNT n .................................................................................................................... 141
GPS RESTART.................................................................................................................................. 141
GPS STATUS..................................................................................................................................... 141
GPS SYNC ......................................................................................................................................... 141
HELP ................................................................................................................................................. 141
INIT n: ............................................................................................................................................... 141
LED DEBUG ..................................................................................................................................... 141
LED SET............................................................................................................................................ 141
LED START....................................................................................................................................... 141
LED STOP ......................................................................................................................................... 141
MEMTEST ........................................................................................................................................ 141
PLL..................................................................................................................................................... 141
QUIT .................................................................................................................................................. 141
RAM ................................................................................................................................................... 142
STACK INIT...................................................................................................................................... 142
STACK TEST..................................................................................................................................... 142
TIME.................................................................................................................................................. 142
TRIGGER_OUT time code................................................................................................................ 142
The Diagnostic Commands - Detailed Description ................................................................................ 142
ABORT............................................................................................................................................... 142

vi

ADC.................................................................................................................................................... 142
ALARM ON/OFF/n........................................................................................................................... 143
BAT n ................................................................................................................................................. 143
CAL .................................................................................................................................................... 145
DAC [n].............................................................................................................................................. 145
DUMP a b .......................................................................................................................................... 145
DVM................................................................................................................................................... 146
EEPROM ........................................................................................................................................... 146
EPISENSOR GAIN........................................................................................................................... 150
EPISENSOR RANGE ....................................................................................................................... 150
FORMAT d ........................................................................................................................................ 151
GPIN .................................................................................................................................................. 151
GPOUT h ........................................................................................................................................... 152
GPS AVERAGING n......................................................................................................................... 152
GPS CLEAR n ................................................................................................................................... 153
GPS DEFAULT................................................................................................................................. 153
GPS DIAGNOSTICS......................................................................................................................... 153
GPS ON.............................................................................................................................................. 155
GPS OFF ........................................................................................................................................... 155
GPS PARAMETERS mod ang sig msk sw ....................................................................................... 156
GPS PULSE_COUNT n .................................................................................................................... 157
GPS RESTART.................................................................................................................................. 157
GPS STATUS..................................................................................................................................... 158
GPS SYNC ......................................................................................................................................... 159
HELP ................................................................................................................................................. 159
INIT n ................................................................................................................................................ 160
LED DEBUG ..................................................................................................................................... 160
LED SET n ........................................................................................................................................ 161
LED START....................................................................................................................................... 161
LED STOP ......................................................................................................................................... 162
MEMTEST ........................................................................................................................................ 162
PASSWORD w, PW w ....................................................................................................................... 162
PLL..................................................................................................................................................... 162
QUIT, Q ............................................................................................................................................. 162
RAM ................................................................................................................................................... 162
STACK INIT...................................................................................................................................... 163
STACK TEST..................................................................................................................................... 163
TIME.................................................................................................................................................. 163
TRIGGER_OUT time code................................................................................................................ 164
6. APPENDICES ...................................................................................................................................... 167
APPENDIX A - Combined K2 and Mt. Whitney Header Structure - Expanded.................................... 167
APPENDIX B - K2 and Mt. Whitney File Structure.............................................................................. 191
APPENDIX C - Altus Instrument Time Structures Defined .................................................................. 193
APPENDIX D - Diagnostic Command EEPROM - 'D' Display EEPROM pages in Hex ..................... 195
APPENDIX E - Default Parameters ....................................................................................................... 199
APPENDIX F - Flash Refresh................................................................................................................ 201

vii

1. Introduction
This manual covers what is commonly called the Monitor Mode operation of the Kinemetrics Altus Series
instruments (also sometimes called Terminal Mode). This mode of operation allows an Altus instrument
to be setup and controlled using a basic "dumb" terminal or terminal emulator.
A second mode of operation, called Block Mode, is discussed briefly in this manual, and in significantly
more detail in the Altus Block Mode manual p/n 302218.

Mode of Communication
The Altus instruments have four modes of communication. One is the traditional MONITOR
mode or terminal window where the user types in commands and responses are sent to the
window in ASCII characters. The second, BLOCK mode, is for communications between a
computer and the instrument. The communications takes place in a structured protocol consisting
of binary packets. When an internal PCMCIA modem is installed or an external modem is
connected to the serial port, one of two additional modem modes should be active, ANSWER
mode or AUTOCALL mode. MONITOR mode is the default on power-up. When the instrument
has finished its power-up BOOT sequence, and if there is no activity at the MONITOR mode
prompt, the instrument will go into BLOCK mode, ANSWER mode or AUTOCALL mode as
appropriate. Both the ANSWER mode and AUTOCALL mode give control of the
communications channel to the modem for incoming calls. The more comprehensive
AUTOCALL mode also initiates calls to specified phone numbers for the selected reasons. See
Document 302218 for the Block Mode - Serial Data Stream Manual.
WHEN A PCMCIA MODEM IS INSTALLED DO NOT INSTALL AN EXTERNAL MODEM
ON THE SERIAL CONNECTOR -- IT WILL BE IGNORED!
ALSO WHEN A PCMCIA MODEM IS INSTALLED IT WILL FORCE 'ANSWER' MODE.
This manual documents these modes of communication. The first chapters document Monitor
mode and the later chapters document Block mode. Direct connection and an external modem use
the front panel RS-232C serial connector at baud rates from 1200 baud to 57600 baud and the
internal modem has a separate connector for its telephone line. When in Block mode type '\\\<cr>'
to enter Monitor mode. When in Monitor mode, type 'BLOCKMODE<cr>' to enter Block mode.

Use of Modems
A command and a parameter are required to correctly use either ANSWER mode or AUTOCALL
mode with a modem. The parameter, MODEM ANSWER or MODEM AUTOCALL, is used to
determine if the instrument should be placed in either ANSWER mode or AUTOCALL mode
upon power-up or system reset. The parameter also determines if a time-out period is activated to
cancel MONITOR mode or BLOCK mode due to 'keyboard' inactivity, no keys typed or no
packets received. This inactivity time-out is five minutes in MONITOR mode and 15 minutes in
BLOCK mode. The monitor command, ANSWERMODE or CALLMODE, is used to start
ANSWER mode or AUTOCALL mode. The command is also used at the end of a telephone call
to the instrument to instruct it to terminate the call and re-enter ANSWER mode or AUTOCALL
mode.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 1

A single backslash, '\', cancels ANSWER mode or AUTOCALL mode. When the instrument
initiates a telephone call, it transmits its call-out message as soon as the connection is made. If
call out acknowledgment is enabled, the recorder waits 60 seconds for the correct
acknowledgment string. The user at the PC (or a script file) has 60 seconds to start talking to the
recorder. After this time-out, there is another 60 second period to enter terminal mode. If there is
no response within this time-out period, the instrument will hang up to free the telephone line. An
example of a telephone call follows. Only the event call out condition flag was set.
Alarm states are automatically cleared or reset by call out services (modem, pager, SMS) under
certain conditions. This occurs when at least one service has requested alarm call out, AND:
- the system enters call mode with no dial attempts pending, OR
- calls are completed to all services that requested alarm notification, OR
- call attempts are exhausted for all requested services
In Etna:
- alarm call out occurs when the threshold for alarm number one is exceeded
- automatic clearing of alarms clears all alarms
RING
CONNECT 14400
FROM: Kinemetrics Altus Mt. Whitney
S/N 141
Stn ID: PASA
Site ID: KMI SOUTH BLDG 1
Comment: DEFAULT PARAMETERS
Callout Msg: KINEMETRICS, INC., 222 VISTA AVE, PASADENA CA
DATE: Aug 29, 2000 08:22:42.000
MESSAGE(S):
NEW EVENT(S) RECORDED: XW004.EVT + 2 subsequent event(s)
ALARM THRESHOLD EXCEEDED
Press '\' to go to command line
Mt. Whitney: Automatically hanging up...
+++
NO CARRIER

The comment and callout message strings will only be sent if they contain characters. The
recorder status is available by issuing the STATUS command.
The filename shown after 'NEW EVENT(S) RECORDED:' is the file that started the modem
callout sequence. The filename is saved until the system is reset or a callout successfully meets
the completion criteria. It is displayed in the event call out message, along with the count of
event(s), if any, occurring after the named event.
When the instrument is in ANSWER mode or AUTOCALL mode, the application program will
send the initialization strings to the modem at regular intervals to ensure it is in the correct state.
This ensures the system can both answer and originate a modem call. The commands
ANSWERMODE and CALLMODE are used to put the instrument in a modem mode directly.
After a power failure or system reset, the communication mode is determined by parameter
settings and by which type of modem, internal or external, is part of the instrument system.

Page 2

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Only setting the MODEM ANSWER or MODEM AUTOCALL parameter to ON will initiate a
time-out for 'keyboard' inactivity or no packet activity. While at the instrument site this time-out
can be disabled by changing the MODEM ANSWER or MODEM AUTOCALL parameter to
OFF. If you forget to change the parameter back to ON before you leave the site, you may need
another trip to the instrument site to correct this and restore the modem link!

External Modems
An external modem is connected to the same front panel serial connector that is used to talk
directly to the unit. To communicate with the instrument over the telephone lines, dial the phone
number and when connected type a single backslash, '\', to enter MONITOR mode. Then continue
as if you were directly connected to the instrument. At the end of the telephone call, return to the
MONITOR mode and enter the ANSWERMODE or CALLMODE command to terminate the call
and return the instrument to the proper communication mode. To perform a field service visit,
disconnect the modem from the instrument and connect directly to it. Type a single backslash, '\',
to quit the modem mode and enter MONITOR mode. When you are finished, return to
MONITOR mode, if necessary, and enter the ANSWERMODE or CALLMODE command to
return the instrument to its modem mode and then reconnect the external modem.
When using external modems or other external communications equipment, be sure to use the
AUTOBAUD command to disable the AUTOBAUD feature. This prevents breaks from changing
the serial port baud rate.

Internal Modems
When a PCMCIA modem is installed it has a separate connection to the outside world from the
front panel serial connector. A call to the instrument using the internal modem is the same as
using the external modem. Dial the phone number and when connected type a single backslash,
'\', to quit the modem mode and enter MONITOR mode. Then continue as if you were directly
connected to the instrument. At the end of the telephone call, return to the MONITOR mode and
enter the ANSWERMODE or CALLMODE command to terminate the call and return the
instrument to the proper modem mode. To perform a field service visit, connect your PC to the
front panel serial connector and type any key. The instrument will respond with either
MODEM in control and inactive
or
MODEM in control and active

The latter message means that the modem is off-hook and has a data carrier, either the instrument
is attempting a connection or another system is communicating with the instrument. Normally,
however, the modem will be inactive and it is safe to take control of the communications channel.
Type four backslashes and a carriage return, '\\\\<cr>'. This may need to be repeated until
communication is established. The first three backslashes will transfer control of the
communications channel from the modem to the front panel connector and the last backslash will
put the system in MONITOR mode. The carriage return, <cr>, displays the '*' main prompt. Then
communicate with the instrument in the usual manner. When you are finished, return to
MONITOR mode, if necessary, and enter the ANSWERMODE or CALLMODE command to
terminate the call and return the instrument to its modem mode.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 3

Network Option Board

The K2 and Makalu recorders with New MCU may be equipped with an internal Network Option
Board that provides an Ethernet 10Base-T connection. This connection redirects the Altus
communication channel used for commands, parameter setting and file transfers through a single
port at a specified IP address. The redirected communication channel may be used for any of
these purposes, as well as for continuous streaming over IP, but does NOT provide a general
purpose IP stack. See Application Note 48 for details.
When a Network Option Board is installed it has a separate connection to the outside world from
the front panel serial connector. Communicating with the instrument using the internal Network
Option Board is the same as using the front panel connection. To perform a field service visit for
a unit connected via a network connection, connect your PC to the front panel serial connector
and take control of the communications channel by typing four backslashes and a carriage return,
'\\\\<cr>'. This may need to be repeated until communication is established.
The inactive port will monitor the communications channel for this sequence and will take control
of the communications channel (in this case away from the network connection). This "take
control" sequence may be performed from either port.
Once you have taken control of the communication channel, you may then communicate with the
instrument in the usual manner. When you are finished, you may simply disconnect as a fiveminute timeout will return the communications channel to that previously set by the "NET"
command.

ISDN Terminal Adapters ("Modems")

The Altus firmware supports PCMCIA ISDN Terminal Adapters, often called "Modems" for all
but the ETNA. The firmware will support V.120 rate adaptation, allowing the use of a single B
channel for communication.
To use an ISDN modem, the MODEM INIT string must be modified to add additional AT
commands. These commands will be vary from modem type to modem type.
The user will need to have some information about the ISDN line that the modem will be
connected to. This information should be in the network specifications provided by the ISDN
service provider. The information needed is the ISDN switch type and the SPID numbers.
To use a USRobotics ISDN modem the INIT string should be as follows:
AT&FE0&C1S0=1%A2=2!C6=aaaaa!C7=bbbbb!N1=ccccc!N2=ddddd&WZ

Where 'aaaaa' is the SPID of the first B channel, 'bbbbb' is the SPID of the second B channel,
'ccccc' is the local ISDN number of the first B channel and 'ddddd' is the local ISDN number of
the second B channel. If the switch type is not National ISDN-1, then an additional command of
!C0=a

will be needed in the INIT string, where a = 0 if the switch type is AT&T 5ESS and a = 1 if the
switch type is Northern Telecom DMS-100.

Page 4

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

If the MODEM INIT string is set correctly, the D indicator on the NT-1 U interface will be a
steady green after the ANSWER command is issued. If the indicator is off or blinking green,
there is a problem with the connection or the MODEM INIT string.
Manufacturers of ISDN modems other than USRobotics will require similar changes to the
MODEM INIT string, but the specific AT commands will probably be different.

Pager Call Out

The system supports text based pagers by dialing out to a number provided and making a report
to the pager. The phone number of the pager and format of the report are specified in a paging file
that must be located on the root directory of the A: drive. If present, paging will be configured.
Paging will be disabled if the file does not exist. The file name must be PAGER.TXT. In the
event that a numeric pager is detected, only the instrument serial number will be sent.
Paging (if enabled) will be scheduled at the time that a callout is scheduled due to event detection,
alarm, or check in. Paging supports the same number of attempts and retries as callouts.
The file will have the following format:
Record 1: Phone number of paging service
Record 2 and following: Text and keys of reporting information as follows:
$type: text and tokens

The following types are defined:

$I:
$E:
$A:
$C:

Pager telephone number

Event detection message string
Alarm detection message string
Time based check in message string

The text of the report for each time will be standard ASCII text, with embedded tokens that are
replaced before transmission. At the present time, only one token is defined:
$N: Recorder serial number

A sample file follows:

918185418000
$I: 9306034
$E: Etna $N triggered
$A: $N alarm detected
$C: Check in of $N
$Z

NOTE: Paging is not supported through external modems.

Short Message Services

This section describes the implementation of support for the GSM Short Message Services (SMS)
in Altus instruments. The instruments that will provide this service are Etna Basic, Makalu, K2
with new MCU and Mt. Whitney with new MCU. This implementation provides these

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 5

instruments with the ability to send notification messages via the SMS services, which uses a
secondary carrier that is expected to better survive a natural disaster.
The GSM cell phone technology supports an optional service called Short Message Services, or
SMS.
Essentially, SMS is a system designed to allow sending of short messages to and from a cell
phone, usually using a mechanism such as e-mail.
SMS messages are sent using a secondary carrier - not the standard cell phone digital link - so
they are expected by the network providers to be more robust than land-based phone lines or cell
phone connections in the event of a natural disaster such as an earthquake.
SMS messages generally do not count as phone calls. Check with your service provider for
details.
Although there is some variation from one network provider to the next, there are a fair number
of standards relating to SMS:
- AT commands are standardized between modem manufacturers
- PDU mode appears to be the accepted standard vs. Text mode.
- Service Center Address (SCA) and Destination Address (DA) formats are standard.
There are some network specific details:
- As of this writing, the firmware has been tested with an Option International PC70K18 U.S.
internal modem connected to a Nokia phone using Pacific Bell as the GSM service provider,
and with an external Siemens M20T using local GSM service providers in Europe.
- Pacific Bell sends all SMS messages to the same SCA and DA.
- Specific e-mail addresses are encoded as part of the message, ie.
XXX@ZZZ.COM<space>THIS IS A MESSAGE.
Physical requirements
This feature requires an internal or external MODEM that supports GSM (GSM ready) and a
digital cell phone (or equivalent).

Page 6

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

User interface
The SMS option is activated by the use of a file named SMS.TXT, which must be placed in
the top level directory on the A: drive. There are no commands associated with this feature.
The SMS.TXT file must use the format listed below:
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
Tokens:

AT+CMGF=0
Initialization string
12099042030
Service Center Address (SCA)
121
Destination Address (DA)
XXX@YYY.COM
Destination e-mail address.
$E: Event report message
$C: Daily check in message
$A: Alarm message
$F: Power fail message
$G: GPS lock failure message
$Z: End of file token

Embedded tokens placed within messages

$X
$N
$I
$T0
$T1
$T2
$T3
$T4
$T5
$D
$PXX

Destination e-mail address.

Instrument serial number
Station ID
Trigger time month
Trigger time day
Trigger time year
Trigger time hour
Trigger time minute
Trigger time second
Duration
Peak acceleration for channel xx

User
From
From
From
From
From
From
From
From
From
From

specified
parameters
parameters
event
event
event
event
event
event
event
event (in g)

For example, the message token:

$E: $X $I $T $P01 $P02 $P03

Would cause a message to be sent to the destination e-mail address which would include the
station ID, trigger time and peaks for channels 1-3. Note: the message is limited by SMS to
70 characters in length, including the e-mail address and delimiting space. Messages that
would exceed this limit will be truncated to 70 characters.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 7

Token details
The tokens $E:, $A:, $F:, $G:, and $C: must be placed at the beginning of the line they are
declared on, and must have a space following the colon. In the event that a space is not
inserted after the colon, the character following the space will be ignored. Only those events
that you want reported need be specified in the file. For example, if you don't want or need a
daily checkin message, exclude the $C: line from the file.
The token $X is the string specified on line 4 of the SMS.TXT file. It is included as a token
to provide for the possibility that some providers may use the DA as the destination e-mail
address. When this is the case, line 4 may be left blank and the $X token not used within the
message. With most SMS providers, the $X must be included in all message descriptions.
Token $T
$T is the actual time that the trigger occurred. The 6 components of the trigger time have
been separated to provide flexibility for the user. Each of the 6 components will be
translated into the appropriate integers. No leading 0 padding is provided on any of the
components. No delimiting characters are automatically provided. Any delimitation that
is required for readability or to avoid ambiguity must be included in the message.
Example 1:
$T0/$T1/$T2<SPACE>$T3:$T4:$T5

would translate the event time 1:01:01 January 1, 2000 to the message
1/1/2000 1:1:1.

Example 2:
$T0$T1$T2$T3$T4$T5

would translate the event time 1:01:01 January 1, 2000 to the message
112000111

Token $D
$D is the total event time, which includes any pre or post event time. When the $D token
is specified in a message, the message will not be sent until the event has stopped
recording. The value displayed is the event time in seconds. Any tenths of seconds in the
event time will not be displayed.

Page 8

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Token $P
$P is the peak acceleration for a given channel. When the $D token is specified in a
message, the message will not be sent until the event has stopped recording. This value
is computed by determining the peak to peak acceleration and dividing the result by 2.
The value is computed as Gs and is derived by using the individual channel full scale
and accelerometer sensitivity instrument parameters. If these values are not set correctly
the reported value will not be correct. The acceleration is displayed to three decimal
places with a leading 0 if the acceleration is less than 1 g, ie .1g will be displayed as
0.100.
Example token
The token string:
$E: $X $I $N $T0/$T1/$T2 $T3:$T4:$T5 $D $P01 $P02 $P03 Event message

produced the message:

ETNA 1 2/11/2000 9:3:31 14 0.002 0.002 0.002 Event message

During engineering tests in an instrument with the station ID parameter set to ETNA,
and the serial number set to 1.
Example SMS.TXT file:
AT+CMGF=0
12099042030
121
rjb@kmi.com
$C: $X $I $N Daily checkin message
$E: $X $I $N $T0/$T1/$T2 $T3:$T4:$T5 $D $P01 $P02 $P03 Event message
$A: $X $I Alarm message
$F: $X $I Power fail message
$G: $X $I GPS lock failure message
$Z:

Limitations
Tokens should only appear once within a file. A second occurrence of the $E: token, for
example, will result in the first occurrence being ignored. There is no limitation on use of
embedded tokens.
The embedded tokens $T, $D, and $P are only valid within the $E: message token. If these
tokens are included in the daily check in message token ($C) or other messages that don't
support them, they will be sent as they appear, ie. $P, $D or $T.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 9

FTP
This section describes support for the File Transfer Protocol services (FTP) in Altus instruments.
The instruments that will provide this service are Etna Basic, Makalu, K2 with new MCU and Mt.
Whitney with new MCU. This implementation provides these instruments with the ability to send
event (EVT) files via a dialup connection through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) using FTP to
a specified FTP site.
This feature is intended to allow use of local and generally low-cost ISP services to transmit event
files automatically over the Internet to an FTP site provided by the customer. It would allow for
example, Altus recorders to dial a local ISP and transmit recorded EVT files to a remote data
center's FTP site.
This feature is not for providing continuous transmission of data (streaming) or for allowing
remote parameter adjustments via the FTP connection. This is for file transfer from the Altus
recorder to the user's FTP site via a dial-up connection through an ISP. These connections are
temporary in nature and must be initiated by the Altus since the ISP will not call the Altus.
When using the Altus's FTP services, control of instrument parameters is possible in those few
cases it may be necessary by simply making a phone call using QuickTalk and a conventional
telephone modem.
For other TCP/IP communications options to support continuous transmission, see Kinemetrics
Application Note #45 that describes external device servers (serial to Ethernet converters that are
outside of the Altus enclosure) and Kinemetrics Application Note #48 that describes an internal
Network Option Board that is essentially an embedded device server.
NOTE 1: Altus FTP services are included in the general Altus firmware distribution, but
are a separately licensed option. In order to use FTP services, you must obtain an
authorization code for your Altus recorder. Contact Kinemetrics for further information.
This feature is activated by placing a file TCPIP.TXT in the root directory of the A: drive. A file
sent to an FTP site will have the instrument serial number prepended. For example, file
AA001.EVT in instrument 100 will be sent as 100_AA001.EVT.
In the event that a file with that name exists at the FTP site, the instrument will attempt to delete
it.
If unable to delete the file the instrument will add a single digit number to the file name after the
serial number (e.g.: 100_1_AA001.EVT). If necessary the instrument will increment this number
to a maximum of 9.
After a file is sent, its archive bit will be cleared.

Page 10

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

A sample TCPIP.TXT file is shown below:

EG20IT
9155550
$N: username
$P: password
$A: 131.204.5.243 (this is an example address only)
$B: pub/incoming
$C: anonymous
$D: anonymous
$Z:

A line-by-line description of the file is shown below:

Line 1 is an FTP authorization code based on the MCU board serial number stored in the
serial EEPROM. This number is not user settable and should not be confused with the
instrument serial number, that can be set by the user. This serial number can be determined
by using the DG EEPROM command.
Line 2 is the telephone number for the ISP. There is no provision for a secondary ISP phone
number.
The remaining lines are tokenized and may be placed in any order after the second line. All
tokens except $E must be included for proper operation.
$N: is the ISP login name.
$P: is the ISP login password.
$A: is the IP address of the FTP site. Numbers are required, URLs like "www.kmi.com" are
not supported.
$B: is the destination directory name/path in the FTP site.
$C: is the FTP site login name.
$D: is the FTP site login password.
$E: X, is an optional delete after transmission parameter. It is an integer number of days to
retain a transmitted file. Any event file (.EVT) found> that has its archive bit clear will be
deleted if it is more than X days old. If X is given a value of 0, files will not be deleted. If the
token is not included in the file, the instrument will use a default of no file deletion.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 11

$O: X, is an options token. It is an unsigned integer token with a range of 0 to 65535. There
is no range or value checking other than exclusion of non-integer digits. When included in a
file, it provides bit-mapped operational options as described below:
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:

Prevents dialout while instrument is recording (triggered).

Prevents dialout unless a file, with its archive bit set, exists.
Undefined.
Undefined.
Undefined.
Undefined.
Undefined.
Undefined.
Undefined.
Undefined.
Undefined.
Undefined.
Undefined.
Undefined.
Undefined.
Undefined.

Without any options selected:

If the instrument triggers, it will dial into the ISP immediately. Once it has established a
connection with the ISP, it will login to the FTP site.
When the connection to the site is established, it will search the EVT directory for files
with the archive bit set. Any files it finds will be sent.
If there are no files to send, it will determine if it is recording.
If it is not recording, it will wait 2 seconds, test for any new files, then hang up,
reporting successful file transfer.
If it is recording, it will wait for 2 times the post-event time for recording to stop.
If recording does not stop within this time, it will hang up and retry the FTP attempt
after checking for any other required telephone activity (SMS, Paging, etc.).
The instrument will retry according to the Dial Attempts parameter setting.
If option bit 0 is set, (option value = 1):
The instrument will not attempt to dial the ISP if it is recording.
If the instrument is not recording, it will dial the ISP as indicated above.
It will retry the FTP attempt after checking for any other required telephone activity
(SMS, Paging, etc.).
The instrument will retry according to the Dial Attempts parameter setting.

Page 12

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

If option bit 1 is set, (option value = 2):

The instrument will not attempt to dial the ISP unless it determines that a file with the
archive bit set exists.
If a file with the archive bit exists, it will dial the ISP as indicated above.
It will retry the FTP attempt after checking for any other required telephone activity
(SMS, Paging, etc.).
The instrument will retry according to the Dial Attempts parameter setting.
If both option bits 0 and 1 are set, (option value = 3):
The instrument will not attempt to dial the ISP if it is recording, or a file with the archive
bit set does not exist.
If the instrument is not recording and a file with the archive bit set exists, it will dial the
ISP as indicated above.
It will retry the FTP attempt after checking for any other required telephone activity
(SMS, Paging, etc.).
The instrument will retry according to the Dial Attempts parameter setting.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 13

2. The Terminal Window - Monitor Mode

The Terminal Window - Monitor Mode

The Monitor Mode in the Altus K2 & Mt. Whitney instruments uses a Terminal Window which
has the standard RS-232C communications protocol that accepts ASCII characters and returns
ASCII characters. The general command format is the command followed by optional arguments
where necessary, and terminated with a carriage return <cr>. The commands available in the
Monitor Mode are in three categories: The main commands, '*' prompt, the parameter editor
commands, prompt 'EDIT>' and the diagnostic commands, prompt 'DG>'. Use ABORT, QUIT or
Q to exit the EDIT> and DG> prompts and return to the main '*' prompt. Typing a command
without an argument, in most cases, will return a short help message. Altus commands only need
the first three characters of the command word(s) if they exceed three characters. Some examples
are:
*ALARM DURATION 2<cr>
*ala dur 2<cr>
*status<cr>
*sta<cr>

where <cr> is the ENTER key.

The commands can be password protected unless specified otherwise. When a command is
password protected, typing it will invoke the response:
Password required

See the password command description for details on setting or removing password protection.
To start the monitor mode, type '\\\<cr>'. To end the monitor mode, type 'BLOCKMODE'.
Unless a BLOCK mode packet command is referenced in a Monitor mode command, the
command is only available in Monitor mode.
The baud rates available in the Altus instruments are 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400 and
1200.
When you are direct connected to the front panel serial port, the baud rate of the front panel serial
port is unknown, AND the AUTOBAUD feature is enable, use your communications program to
send two BREAK characters within five seconds to the instrument (in QuickTalk use Control-B).
This will start the AUTOBAUD sequence and drop the baud rate by one speed. The instrument
will return a message with its new baud rate:
[9600 BAUD]

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 15

You will not be able to read it unless your communication program is at that baud rate.
Subsequent BREAKs within five seconds of the previous BREAK will drop the baud rate again.
Pause long enough between sending BREAKs to see the response but not long enough for the five
second time-out to occur. When the baud rate is 1200 it will go to 57600 after receiving the next
BREAK. After matching the instrument's baud rate to that of your communications program, type
'\\\\<cr>' to enter monitor mode. You may need to repeat this once.
A baud rate changed by the auto baud sequence will return to the baud rate set by the
BAUDRATE command after a one hour inactivity time-out. If you desire to change the baud rate
to a new setting, do so now using the BAUDRATE command.
See the BAUDRATE parameter command for more information.

Page 16

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

3. The Main Commands in Monitor Mode

The Main Commands

*\\\<cr>
Three backslashes followed by the ENTER key. Enter monitor mode (character serial
communications), exit block mode (binary packet communications). BLOCKMODE returns
instrument to block mode. Not password protected.

A:, B:
Changes the current drive. Not password protected.

ALARM ALARM n
Sets the number of alarms levels available on an Etna.

ALARM DURATION s
Sets alarm duration for all alarms. s = 0-60 seconds.

ALARM OFF
Turns alarms off.

ALARM SOH n
Enables or disables SOH status on alarm 2 for selected systems.

ANSWERMODE
Enters ANSWER mode. Requires an internal/external modem connected to the instrument. Same
as the command CALLMODE. When the EDIT MODEM parameters are set correctly, it tells the
recorder to hang up the modem and send the initialization string so the modem is prepared to
answer any calls. Set the MODEM ANSWER parameter ON to re-enter ANSWER mode at a
system reset or a power failure. Also activates a five minute inactivity time-out for monitor mode,
causing it to switch to answer mode. A single backslash, '\' quits ANSWER mode and goes to
MONITOR mode.

AQ ON/OFF
Enable/disable acquisition.

AQ AUTO_DELETE n
Enables or disables automatic file deletion. When set to 1 (on), the system will automatically
delete .EVT files with the smallest peak-to-peak acceleration values until overall disk utilization
is below 90%. The default is automatic file deletion disabled.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 17

AQ CLEAR_EVENT_COUNTER n
Enables or disables clearing of the event counter on restart. When set to 1 (on), the system will
clear the event counter on restart. This can be used to help keep the event and restart counters in
sync so that the counts can be used to construct the filename of the last created EVT file. The
default is 0 (off), which means that the event counter is NOT cleared on restart.

AQ DEBUG
Toggles acquisition debug mode. If enabled, recording activities will be displayed in monitor
mode. QuickTalk(r) always displays recording activity in its Message Window.

AQ DIAGNOSTICS
For Kinemetrics internal use only. This command is used to test data flow through buffers when
the system is triggered. Its use is not supported for the end user.

AQ DISABLE_LED n
Enables or disables blinking of the Etna front panel LED during triggered event recording or
streaming data output. This function is supported for the Etna only.

AQ DVM
Displays channel input signals while in Acquisition.

AQ FILE
Selects the TREE (directory for each date) or the FLAT file (\EVT directory only) system.
[Application firmware 2.00 or later].

AQ FT
Performs a Functional Test Record. The FT will be recorded only if the trigger parameters have
been set up correctly.

AQ PEAK
While an event is recording, this command will display the current maximum and minimum
peaks for each channel. (Application firmware 2.00 or later)

AQ SRT
Records a Sensor Response Test event at 1000 sps for 7.2 seconds. (Application firmware 2.0 or
later)

AQ TRIGGER
When acquisition is on, starts recording a keyboard event. Keyboard trigger.

AQ DETRIGGER
When acquisition is on, ends recording of a keyboard event.

AUTOBAUD n
Enables or disables auto baud rate sequence. 0=enable, 1=disable. AUTOBAUD should be
disabled when using external communications equipment connected to the front panel serial port,
since incoming BREAK characters will cause the instrument to change the baud rate.

Page 18

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

BAUDRATE r
Permanently changes the Altus baud rate. Rates(r) are 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400
and 1200. (Only available in Monitor Mode.)

BLOCKMODE
Exits monitor mode (character serial communications), enters blockmode (binary packet
communications). '\\\<cr>' return to monitor mode.

CALLMODE
Enters AUTOCALL mode. Requires an internal/external modem connected to the Altus. Same as
the ANSWERMODE command. When the EDIT MODEM parameters are set correctly, the
recorder hangs up the modem and sends the initialization string so the modem is prepared to
answer any calls. Set the MODEM AUTOCALL parameter to ON to re-enter AUTOCALL mode
at a system reset or a power failure. Also activates a five minute inactivity time-out for monitor
mode, causing it to switch to answer mode. A single backslash, '\' quits AUTOCALL mode and
goes to MONITOR mode.

CD p, CHDIR p
Change Altus directory. p= pathname. Not password protected.

CLEAR ALARM
Reset all alarms, same function as ALARM OFF.

CLEAR ALL_LEDS
Resets event LEDs and alarms. Does not reset the event count.

CLEAR EVENT_LED
Resets the Event LED and resets the number of events to zero(0).

COPY sf df
Copies a file to a new file. sf = source filename, df = destination filename. (Only available in
Monitor mode.)

DEL p
Deletes a Altus event file from the current directory. p = pathname, wildcards are accepted. Same
as ERASE.

DG
Enter DIAGNOSTICS mode. (See Diagnostic Commands.) ABORT or QUIT exits. Not
password protected.

DIR p
Displays directories and/or directory contents. Wildcards are accepted. p = pathname. Not
password protected.

DISPLAY BITMAP
Displays channels selected for recording.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 19

DISPLAY CHANNEL
Displays channel parameters and locations.

DISPLAY MODEM
Displays current modem and cellular phone power control strings.

DISPLAY RWMISC
Displays miscellaneous status information.

DISPLAY SENSOR
Displays sensor related information.

DISPLAY SERIAL_DATA_STREAM
Displays Serial Data Stream parameters.

DISPLAY STREAM
Displays stream and DFS parameters.

DISPLAY WRITE file

Writes all display parameters to the specified file.

EDIT
Enter Parameter Edit mode. See Parameter Edit Commands. QUIT or ABORT to exit.

ERASE p
ERASE an Altus event file. Same as DEL.

FORMAT d
Formats a new PCMCIA card. d = drivename. The drivers for the recording media, PCMCIA
hard drives and SanDisks, have been modified to improve system throughput and compatibility
with personal computers and Laptops. TO INSURE PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION ANY
PCMCIA HARD DRIVE OR SANDISK MUST BE FORMATTED IN THE RECORDER
PRIOR TO USING IT. FORMATTING THE PCMCIA HARD DRIVE OR SANDISK IN A PC
OR A LAPTOP MAY RESULT IN DATA LOSS. (Only available in Monitor mode.)

HELP
Lists all main commands.

MD p, MKDIR p
Make a new directory. p = pathname. (Only available in Monitor mode.)

NET p
Network port enable or disable at next boot. (Only available with K2 or Makalu internal Network
Option Board). p = 0 (Network disabled), p = 1 (Network enabled).

PASSWORD w
Enter the password. Default = "". w = current password.

Page 20

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

PW w
Same as PASSWORD.

PASSWORD NEW w
Change the password. To disable password protection, press ENTER when asked for the new
password. w = current password.

RELEASE
This command is used when you are talking to the recorder through a PCMCIA modem and want
to relinquish control to the serial port. It is also used when you are talking to the serial port and
want to relinquish control to the PCMCIA modem. For the latter case, if no modem is installed
the command does nothing.

RENAME ofn nfn

Renames an Altus event file. ofn = oldfilename. nfn = newfilename. (Only available in Monitor
Mode.)

RD p, RMDIR p
Removes an Altus directory. The subdirectory must be empty. p = pathname. (Only available in
Monitor Mode.)

RX fn
Receives a file from the PC using XMODEM CRC transfer. fn = Altus filename. Use in
conjunction with QuickTalk(r) Transfer Menu item XMODEM Send.

STATUS
Displays a status screen. Not password protected.

SUMMARY
Displays text summary of event files in a directory. Not password protected.

SYSTEM LOAD
Exits to the bootloader without resetting the hardware. This command is useful with internal
modems to allow remote update of firmware via an internal modem. (Only available in Monitor
mode, Application firmware version 2.88 or later).

SYSTEM LOG xx
This command controls logging of call out attempts and other items to a system log file.

SYSTEM RESET
Resets the Altus system. (Only available in Monitor mode.)

TIME y,m,d,h,m,s
Set new date and time. y= year (1994+), m= month (1-12), d= date (1-31), h= hour (0-23),
m=minute (0-59), s=second (0-59). Enter time several seconds ahead. Any key becomes
timemark. Acquisition must be OFF prior to using this command.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 21

TX fn [H] [K] [T] [channel list]

Transmits a file to the PC using XMODEM CRC transfer. fn = Altus filename. [H] transfer
header only. [K] transfer using XMODEM-1K protocol. [T] transfer data truncated to 16-bits.
[channel list] transfer specified channels only. Options [H], [K], [T] and [channel list] are only
available in the Terminal Window with Application firmware 2.00 or later. Use in conjunction
with QuickTalk(r) Transfer Menu item XMODEM Receive.

VERSION
Displays the software version numbers. Not password protected.

WIPEDISK d
Erases the entire disk. d= drivename. (Only available in Monitor mode.)

Page 22

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

The Main Commands - Detailed Description

A:, B:
This command sets the current drive. The drive may be a SanDisk or other PCMCIA recording
media. The A: or B: refer to the slot on the PCMCIA board. The form of the command is:
A:<cr>
B:<cr>

Not password protected.

ALARM ALARM n
This command is used to set the number of alarm levels available on an Etna. The Etna has two
different alarm outputs available, which can be used to indicate one, two, or three alarm levels by
using the outputs individually, or as a bit combination (both alarm outputs 1 and 2 are asserted
when alarm level 3 is exceeded).
The ALARM ALARM command affects the behavior not only of the alarm outputs themselves,
but also of the following commands:
DG ALARM n will require an alarm level specifier, as: ALARM n.
CLEAR ALARM will clear the alarms on all levels.
ALARM DURATION will specify the alarm duration of all alarms.
CHANNEL ALARM will require the correct number of parameters, one for each level, as:
CHANNEL ALARM 1 1.0 2.0 3.0.
The default value for ALARM ALARM is zero. Values of 0 and 1 will cause the recorder to
operate with a single alarm output.
NOTE: Alarm levels 2 and 3 on the Etna are stored in the alarm level locations for channels 5
through 8 and 9 through 12, since the Etna uses the same header structure as a K2, but never uses
the channel data for channels 5 through 12. Alarm levels 2 and 3 must be set using the
CHANNEL ALARM monitor mode command, but will not be altered inadvertently when other
parameters are modified using QuickTalk.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 23

ALARM DURATION s
This command enters the duration of the alarm signals. s = seconds, 1 - 60. Setting the duration to
zero(0) seconds turns the pulse ON immediately and it will remain ON until turned OFF by the
ALARM OFF or CLEAR ALARM command. If using the call out on alarm feature, the alarm
duration must be set to three or more seconds, or latch (0). Settings of one or two seconds will not
work reliably. To get help or to see the current setting type:
Ala dur<cr>

Response:
Syntax: ALARM DURATION = seconds
Alarm Duration: 0 seconds

To enter a new value, type:

ala dur 5<cr>

In an Etna, all alarm levels are affected by the alarm duration.

This command can be password protected.

ALARM OFF
This command turns the alarm signals OFF. The form of the command is:
ala off<cr>

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_RESETALARM

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

ALARM OFF is issued by the system when acquisition is started or stopped.

This command can be password protected.

ALARM SOH n
This command is used to enable or disable state of health reporting via alarm 2 on selected
systems. In this mode, the alarm 2 output will be driven by an indication of a system problem
rather than by exceeding an alarm threshold level. If used, it is recommended that alarm 2 be set
up "fail safe", meaning that an alarm condition will be indicated when a system problem is
detected or when power fails. See the Etna Extended Interconnect manual p/n 302231 for details
on alarm and relay configuration.
Conditions that will indicate a state of health alarm include:
- Recording errors
- Flash memory errors
- RAM errors
- PCMCIA controller errors
- DSP errors
- Parameter block errors

Page 24

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

For state of health alarm reporting to work, the following criteria must be met:
- The instrument type must support this feature
- Firmware must be application version 3.03 or later
- ALARM SOH must be enabled
- Alarm two must be enabled

ANSWERMODE
This command puts the instrument in ANSWER mode and puts the instrument into acquisition. It
is used when an internal/external modem is connected to/installed in the instrument. Same as the
CALLMODE command. When the MODEM parameters are set correctly, the instrument hangs
up the modem and sends the initialization string so the modem is prepared to answer any calls.
Set the MODEM ANSWER parameter to ON to re-enter ANSWER mode at a system reset or a
power failure. A single backslash, '\' quits ANSWER mode and goes to MONITOR mode.
The form of the command is:
ans<cr>

Response when the modem is external:

Entering auto-answer mode.
+++
AT
ATH0
AT&FE0&C1S0=1
[AUTO-CALL MODE: PRESS \ TO QUIT]

Response when the modem in internal:

Entering auto-answer mode

or
MODEM in control & inactive

Also see the EDIT mode MODEM and CELLULAR parameters for proper operation of this
feature.
NOTE: AQ DEBUG and AQ DIAGNOSTICS are forced off by the ANSWERMODE command.
This command can be password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 25

AQ
This command without arguments displays a list of the ACQUISITION commands. Type:
Aq<cr>

Response:
Commands:
AUTO_DELETE
DETRIGGER
FILE
OFF
TRIGGER

CLEAR_EVENT_COUNTER
DIAGNOSTICS
FT
PEAK

DEBUG
DVM
ON
SRT

This command can be password protected.

AQ ON/OFF
This command enables/disables acquisition (recording). The form of the ON command is:
aq on<cr>

If the instrument is already in acquisition, the response is:

Already in acquisition mode.

If the instrument is in acquisition and the AQ OFF command is issued, the response is:
Stopping acquisition...

A typical response for the Altus instruments:

Starting acquisition...
Channels: 6, Sampling Rate: 200, Digital Field Stn: OFF
Ch. Type
Trig
Detrig STA LTA Ratio DeTrig Alarm Weight
1: 1 STA/LTA
1.0 60
4.0 40%
2.000%FS
1
2: 2 Th.
2.000%FS 2.000%FS
2.000%FS
1
3: 3 Th.
2.000%FS 2.000%FS
2.000%FS
1
4: 4 Th.
2.000%FS 2.000%FS
2.000%FS
1
5: 5 Th.
2.000%FS 2.000%FS
2.000%FS
1
6: 6 Th.
2.000%FS 2.000%FS
2.000%FS
1
Weights: Keyboard=1, Network=1, External=1
Stream Trigger=1, Detrigger=1
Pre-event: 3 seconds
Post-event: 10 seconds
Stream scan rate 0.
Serial Data Streaming disabled

Block Mode:

Command packet:
PKC_ACQSTART
PKC_ACQSTOP

Offset
0.000mv
0.000mv
0.000mv
0.000mv
0.000mv
0.000mv

Response packet:
PKR_ACK
PKR_ACK

ALARM OFF is issued by the system when acquisition is started or stopped.

This command can be password protected.

Page 26

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

AQ AUTO_DELETE n
This command enables or disables automatic file deletion when the overall storage is over 90%
utilized. If 'n' is set to 1, automatic file deletion is enabled. If set to 0, automatic file deletion is
disabled.
The default is automatic file deletion disabled.
When this feature is enabled, the storage is periodically scanned to check to see if the overall
storage (if two drives are used, both the A: and B: drives) is over 90% utilized. If it is under 90%
utilized, nothing is done. However, if automatic file deletion is enabled and the overall storage is
over 90% utilized, the files will be scanned and the files with the smallest peak-to-peak
acceleration values will be deleted until the storage utilization on at least one drive is again under
90%.
Notes about this feature:
- AUTO_DELETE will only delete .EVT files.
- AUTO_DELETE will only scan two levels into the directory structure.
- AUTO_DELETE will not delete files in the root directory or the TMP subdirectory.
- AUTO_DELETE will affect the creation of new files. When enabled, new files are created
on the primary drive if it is under 90% utilized. If not, the file will be created on the
secondary drive if it is under 90% utilized. If both drives are over 90% utilized, the file will
be created on the primary drive if there is any space left at all, else it will be created on the
secondary drive.
- AUTO_DELETE and automatic FT after event (via the STR FT command) are mutually
exclusive. Priority is given to AUTO_DELETE such that if on, automatic FT after event will
simply not occur. An FT can still manually be performed using AQ FT.
To view the current state of auto file delete, type:
* aq aut<cr>

The response will be similar to:

Syntax: AUTO_DELETE n.
AUTO_DELETE on.

0 to disable, 1 to enable.

To enable auto file delete, type:

* aq aut 1<cr>

The instrument will respond:

AUTO_DELETE on.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 27

To disable auto file delete, type:

* aq aut 0<cr>

The instrument will respond:

AUTO_DELETE off.

This command can be password protected.

AQ CLEAR_EVENT_COUNTER n
Enables or disables clearing of the event counter on restart. When set to 1 (on), the system will
clear the event counter on restart. This can be used to help keep the event and restart counters in
sync so that the counts can be used to construct the filename of the last created EVT file.
The default is 0 (off), which means that the event counter is NOT cleared on restart.
To view the current state of event clear at restart, type:
* aq cle<cr>

The response will be similar to:

Syntax: CLEAR_EVENT_COUNTER n.
CLEAR_EVENT_COUNTER on.

0 to disable, 1 to enable.

To enable event clear at restart, type:

* aq cle 1<cr>

The instrument will respond:

Event counter will be cleared on restart.

To disable event clear at restart, type:

* aq cle 0<cr>

The instrument will respond:

Event counter will NOT be cleared on restart.

This command can be password protected.

Page 28

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

AQ DEBUG
Toggles the acquisition debug display. If enabled, recording activities are displayed. These block
mode packet messages are always displayed in the QuickTalk(r) Message Window. To toggle this
display, type:
Aq deb<cr>

The response will be one of the following:

Acquisition debug mode:ENABLED
Acquisition debug mode:DISABLED

When the acquisition debug mode is ENABLED the following would be a typical sequence for a
keyboard trigger event. 'AQ TRI' is the trigger command and 'AQ DET' is the detrigger
command.
* aq tri
Keyboard triggered
* EVENT DETECTED
OPENING EVENT FILE: A:\TMP\KI001.EVT
aq det
Keyboard detriggered
* ENTERING POST-EVENT
CLOSING EVENT FILE
MOVING A:\TMP\KI001.EVT -> A:\EVT\950628\KI001.EVT

NOTE: AQ DEBUG is forced off by the ANSWERMODE, CALLMODE, RX, or TX

commands.
This command can be password protected.

AQ DIAGNOSTICS
For Kinemetrics internal use only. This command is used to test data flow through buffers when
the system is triggered. Its use is not supported for the end user. For reference an example is:
Start= 203
Buffer= 0

Write= 157
Overflow= 0

Read= 244
Diff= 87

Add= 244

NOTE: AQ DIAGNOSTICS is forced off by the ANSWERMODE, CALLMODE, RX, or TX

commands.
Not password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 29

AQ DISABLE_LED n
Enables or disables blinking of the Etna front panel LED during triggered event recording or
streaming data output. When set to 1 (disabled), the Etna will not flash the front panel LED
during triggered event recording or streaming data output. This can be used to help reduce
induced 1Hz noise which can be picked up by internal sensor decks during long recordings.
This command uses a single integer argument that may have the values of 0 or 1.
This function is supported for the Etna only.
The default is 0 (enabled), which means that the Etna will blink the EVENT LED on the front
panel.
To view the current state of the disable led function, type:
* aq dis<cr>

The response will be similar to:

Syntax: DISABLE_LED n.
LED is enabled.

0 = don't, 1 = do, disable LED.

To enable the disable led function, type:

* aq dis 1<cr>

The instrument will respond:

LED is enabled.

To disable the disable led function, type:

* aq dis 0<cr>

The instrument will respond:

LED is disabled.

This command can be password protected.

Page 30

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

AQ DVM
This command displays the channel input signals while in Acquisition. The display will show the
values of the incoming signals, six at a time. The display is updated two times a second. For
instruments with more than six channels, select one of the two or three groups of six channels to
display.
Group
1
2
3

Channels
1 - 6
7 - 12
13 - 18

Type any key to cancel the display. Any changes will become active the next time the AQ OFF
- AQ ON command sequence is issued.
The 'Z', zero, command instructs the instrument to save the current value of each channel's signal
(background) as an offset voltage and subtract it from future samples. After typing any other key
to quit the display, answer Yes to save the new non-zero offset voltage and continue to subtract it
from future signals. The current offset voltage for each channel is recorded in any future event
header for reference.
Two new commands are added 7/96. The 'C', clear, command will clear the offset voltage to
0.0V, no offset to remove. After typing any other key to quit the display, answer Yes to save this
0.0V offset voltage and thus subtract nothing from future signals. The 'S', step, command toggles
a step voltage which is applied to any attached FBA sensor for testing purposes. NOTE THAT
THE SYSTEM TRIGGER IS DISABLED WHILE THE STEP VOLTAGE IS APPLIED. If the
STEP is not toggled off, it will be removed after one minute.
NOTE: AQ DVM is affected by any channel mapping that may be in effect. Channel
mapping is applied very early in the handling of data from the sensors, and is made to look
as much as possible as if the sensors had been physically rewired. Therefore, AQ DVM will
display the remapped inputs, and any AQ DVM acquired offset will be applied to the
remapped channels. For this reason, channel mapping should be done BEFORE
determining the AQ DVM offset, because remapping will invalidate any existing offset.
With Application firmware 2.00 or later the following letters are visible at the end of the display
line when the related command is active:
O
S

The current non-zero offset voltage is being removed from the display.
The step voltage, approximately +206mV, is applied to all attached FBA
sensors. With an EpiSensor, the step voltage will be approximately
80mv. On an Makalu, these step voltages are approximately eight times
higher than on the K2, Etna, or Mt. Whitney.

To activate the command, type:

Aq dvm<cr>

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 31

The response for an instrument with more than six channels is:
Select channel group[1-3]:2
Press
Press
Press
Press
2:

number to select another channel group

'C' to clear accelerometer offset voltage,
'S' to toggle accelerometer step voltage,
'Z' to zero, or press any other key to quit.
36.728
-1.600
-15.410
-0.084

-0.083

0.067 mV O

The 'O' at the right side of the display indicates that a non-zero offset voltage is being subtracted
from the data stream to produce the displayed channel voltages. The displayed values are the ones
that would be recorded should an event occur.
If the instrument has six or less channels, the instructions 'Select channel group[1-3]' and 'Press
number to select another channel group' are not displayed.
The display line for a six channel instrument with the 'S' step active and an offset removed is:
242.730 205.500 199.310 206.184 205.183 207.267 mV SO

When the 'Z' or 'C' has been selected, the display has been canceled by typing another key, and
you answer NO to the question, response is:
Permanently apply current offset to the data stream? (y/n)n
No offset will be removed from the data stream

This changes all of the channel offset voltages to 0.0V and the data stream values are not
changed.
When the question is answered YES, the response is :
Permanently apply current offset to the data stream? (y/n)y
The offset will be removed from the data stream

If the last command was 'Z', the non-zero offset voltage will be removed from all future data. If
the last command was 'C', the channels' offset voltages are all 0.0V, and the data stream values
will not be changed. Any change in the offset voltage will take effect immediately upon exiting
this command. If an event is being recorded, this change may introduce a step in the data. The
'AQ ON' response will note the amount of offset to be removed in the last column of the display.
Not password protected.

Page 32

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

AQ FILE
This command selects the organization of recorded events in the instrument. Two file systems are
available: the TREE file system(0), where a new directory is created below \EVT, using the yearmonth-day, when the first event of the day is recorded or the FLAT file system(1), where all
events are place in the \EVT directory. The file system is set to TREE at the factory. The only
way to change it is to use this command. It cannot be changed by download of a .PAR file or by
default of the parameters. The status of this command is not part of the file header/parameters.
Added 7/96. [Application firmware 2.00 or later]. To view the current file system, type:
aq fil

The response will be either

File system type = TREE

[or FLAT]

It's a good idea to issue the WIPEDISK command prior to using the AQ FILE command in order
to remove possibly confusing older files and directories.
To change the file system to FLATFILE, type
aq file 1

The instrument will respond:

aq file = flatfile

Not password protected.

AQ FT
This command causes the instrument to record a functional test record. This record is very similar
to the traditional "key switch calibration sequence" of early Kinemetrics accelerographs and the
same as the 'FT' of the Kinemetrics Solid State Accelerographs. An 'FT' consists of 2 seconds of
acceleration background signal then 2 seconds of deflated mass signal. The damping is then
removed and the mass is allowed to return to the zero level and "ring" for 2 seconds. After the
ringing, the damping is reapplied and the mass is again offset for 2 seconds. Finally, the event
finishes with a 10 second section of background. The step applied to the FBAs is set to +2.5Vdc.
The "cal" adjust on each internal FBA is set to output 0.25Vdc into the instrument front end. Each
'FT' event is flagged with a special bit in the header to allow the 'SUMMARY' command to
indicate "FT' events as opposed to detected seismic events. The form of the command is:
aq ft<cr>

Response:
Performing Functional Test...
NOTE: Event duration depends on trigger setup

BLOCK mode:

March, 2006

Command Packet
PKC_FT

Document 302219 Rev P

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

Page 33

In the Altus Makalu instrument (+/- 20V FullScale input) the default trigger threshold of 2% is
too high to reliably record the FT sequence when using FBA sensors. If FBA sensors will be used
with the Altus Makalu and use of the FT is desired, it is recommended that the trigger threshold
be set to 1% or less.
As of Application Firmware version 2.97, the FT will force initial trigger of the system in order to
help with recording of small FT signals. It is recommended that post-event time be set to a
minimum of 10 seconds in order to take advantage of forced FT recording.
This command can be password protected.

Figure 1 - FT Event (FBA) - Full Scale

Page 34

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

The following figure zoom in on an FT event was displayed in QuickLook(r) for DOS

Figure 2 - FT Event - Zoomed In

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 35

The following figure is of an FT event on an EpiSensor equipped recorder. Note that the FT is a
two sided pulse for an EpiSensor.

Figure 3 - FT Event (EpiSensor) - Full Scale

Selected systems support variable functional test amplitudes. This is accomplished by passing a
parameter to the AQ FT command ranging from 1-4095. Larger numbers generate larger
amplitude FT signals. The form of the command is:
aq ft 2048<cr>

For variable functional test amplitudes to work, the following criteria must be met:
- The instrument type must support this feature
- Sensors used must be EpiSensors
- Firmware must be application version 3.03 or later
For a discussion of the sensor type and EpiSensor sensitivity determination, see the section titled
Sensor Type and Sensitivity Determination.

Page 36

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

AQ PEAK [x]
While an event being recorded this command will display the latest maximum and minimum
peaks for each channel. Added 7/96. (Application firmware 2.00 or later)
Syntax: AQ PEAK [x] (x=1 extended peaks, x=2 raw peaks)
In the regular peaks command (no x), peaks are uncorrected (not mean removed) and displayed as
a fraction of full scale.
If a file is being recorded the response will be:
* aq pea
Ch 1 NS1
Ch 2 UD1
Ch 3 EW1
:
:
Ch 17 V6
Ch 18 T6

Peaks
Peaks
Peaks

-1.234
0.345
0.997

-2.345 (x fullscale)
0.125 (x fullscale)
-0.876 (x fullscale)

Peaks
Peaks

0.012
0.222

-0.023 (x fullscale)
-0.223 (x fullscale)

Or if the instrument is not recording:

No File Open.

In the extended peaks command (x = 1), peaks are displayed as mean-corrected peaks in units of
V/sensitivity. For systems with sensitivity units in V/g, the result is in g's. Position is reported, if
available.
In the raw peaks command (x = 2), peaks are displayed as a fraction of full scale, but at higher
resolution than the regular peaks command. Added data fields include the mean, gain, full-scale
value, and sensitivity. Position is reported, if available.
Positions in the raw and extended peaks commands are reported in decreasing order of accuracy
based on position quality. A label states their type: averaged position, last position (single
position), no position available.
Examples:
* aq
Ch.
Ch.
Ch.

pea
1 KMIL Peaks: -0.0011 -0.0011 (x fullscale)
2 KMIV Peaks: -0.0013 -0.0012 (x fullscale)
3 KMIT Peaks: -0.0011 -0.0010 (x fullscale)

* aq pea 1
Ch ID
Mean-Corrected Peaks
Min
Max
1 KMIL -0.000011
0.000014
2 KMIV -0.000014
0.000024
3 KMIT -0.000008
0.000017
Averaged Position: 34.148659N -118.102425E 203m

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 37

* aq pea 2
Ch ID
Peaks (FFS)
Mean (FFS) Gain
Min
Max
1 KMIL -0.001143 -0.001118 -0.001132
1
2 KMIV -0.001275 -0.001200 -0.001248
2
3 KMIT -0.001095 -0.001018 -0.001069
3
Averaged Position: 34.148659N -118.102425E 203m

FS (V)

Sens (V/unit)

1.10
2.20
3.30

1.100
2.200
3.300

Not password protected.

AQ SRT
This command will record a special Sensor Response Test at 1000 samples per second for 7.2
seconds. Bandwidth is 0-400Hz. Added 7/96. [Mt. Whitney 2.0 or later] The STEP and
UNDAMP signals are sent to the sensors in the usual manner, but the timing is shorter. The
length of the test is limited to 7.2 seconds so that all of the SRT data will fit into memory (the
disk drive is too slow to record data at 1000 sps). After completion of the test the data is written
to an event file, and will be flagged as an SRT event. If the Diagnostic command
TTRIGGER_OUT is in effect, the AQ SRT command will abort. To perform an SRT enter the
following commands:
AQ OFF<cr>
AQ SRT<cr>
AQ ON<cr>

Stops acquisition
Perform SRT test, wait for prompt
Start acquisition

Figure 4 - SRT Event - Full Scale

Page 38

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Figure 5 - SRT Event - Zoomed in on Channel 2

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 39

The following figure is of an SRT event on an EpiSensor equipped recorder. Note that the SRT
event is a pseudo-random noise sequence for an EpiSensor. It looks totally different from the SRT
for an FBA.
The algorithm used for the pseudo-random noise sequence is as follows:
R(n+1) = (R(n) * 2041 + 3235) & 0xFFF

The SRT begins with a seed value of 2048. Analysis indicates that there are 4096 distinct values
before the sequence repeats.
The value is applied to the DAC which outputs +2.5 Volts when 0 is applied, 0 volts when 2048
is applied, and -2.499 volts when 4095 is applied.

Figure 6 - SRT Event (EpiSensor) - Full Scale

Page 40

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

The following figure is a PSD (Power Spectral Density) plot of an EpiSensor SRT. The plot
shown was generated using the Kinemetrics PSD program.

Figure 7 - PSD of an EpiSensor SRT Event

For a discussion of the sensor type and EpiSensor sensitivity determination, see the section titled
Sensor Type and Sensitivity Determination.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 41

AQ TRIGGER
When acquisition is ON, the instrument starts recording if the Keyboard has been assigned
sufficient votes to trigger the instrument. Keyboard trigger. Keyboard event. The form of the
command is:
Aq tri<cr>

The response will be either:

Keyboard triggered.

or
Start acquisition first with AQ ON command!

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_TRIGGER

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

This command can be password protected.

AQ DETRIGGER
This command stops a keyboard event provided the keyboard has been assigned sufficient votes
to detrigger the instrument. Keyboard detrigger. The from of the command is:
Aq det<cr>

The response will be either:

Keyboard detriggered

or
Start acquisition first with AQ ON command!

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_DETRIGGER

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

This command can be password protected.

AUTOBAUD n
This command enables or disables auto baud rate sequence. 0=enable, 1=disable. AUTOBAUD
should be disabled when using external communications equipment connected to the front panel
serial port, since incoming BREAK characters will cause the instrument to change the baud rate.
To disable autobaud, type:
Aut 1<cr>

Response:
AutoBaud Rate Disabled

Page 42

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

When the command is entered without an argument the following is displayed:

Syntax: AUTOBAUD rate disable. 0 to enable autobaud. 1 to disable autobaud.
AutoBaud Rate Disabled.

This command can be password protected.

See also BAUDRATE.

BAUDRATE r
This command permanently changes the Altus recorder baudrate. The available rates are 57600,
38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400 and 1200 baud. Be sure that your PC is able to communicate at
the selected baud rate. QuickTalk(r) will support up to 57600 baud. To enter a new baud rate,
type:
Bau 9600<cr>

Response:
Caution: If your terminal does not support the chosen
baud rate, you will not be able to communicate with the K2!
Press ENTER to set baud rate to 9600.
Press any other key to cancel.

When the command is entered without an argument the following is displayed:

Syntax: BAUDRATE = baudrate
Valid baud rates:
57600, 38400, 19200, 9600,

4800,

2400,

1200

When you are direct connected to the front panel serial port, the baud rate of the front panel serial
port is unknown, AND the AUTOBAUD feature is enable, use your communications program to
send two BREAK characters within five seconds to the instrument (in QuickTalk use Control-B).
This will start the AUTOBAUD sequence and drop the baud rate by one speed. The instrument
will return a message with its new baud rate:
[9600 BAUD]

You will not be able to read it unless your communication program is at that baud rate.
Subsequent BREAKs within five seconds of the previous BREAK will drop the baud rate again.
Pause long enough between sending BREAKs to see the response but not long enough for the five
second time-out to occur. When the baud rate is 1200 it will go to 57600 after receiving the next
BREAK. After matching the instrument's baud rate to that of your communications program, type
'\\\\<cr>' to enter monitor mode. You may need to repeat this once.
A baud rate changed by the auto baud sequence will return to the baud rate set by the
BAUDRATE command after a one hour inactivity time-out. If you desire to change the baud rate
to a new setting, do so now using the BAUDRATE command.
This command can be password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 43

BLOCKMODE
Typing this command will close the monitor mode (character serial communications), and starts
the blockmode (binary packet communications). Type '\\\<cr>' to return to the monitor mode. The
form of the command is:
Blo<cr>

The response:
Entering block mode...
Type '\\\' <CR> to enter monitor mode

Not password protected.

CALLMODE
This command puts the instrument into AUTOCALL MODE. It requires an internal\external
modem connected to the Altus instrument. Be sure that the modem and AUTOCALL parameters
are correctly set. To cancel AUTOCALL MODE, type a back-slash followed by a carriage return,
'\<cr>'. The form of the command is:
Cal<cr>

Response when acquisition was OFF. Puts instrument into acquisition and then sets up external
modem:
Channels: 6, Sampling Rate: 200, Digital Field
Ch. 1 Trig=2.00%, Detrig=2.00%, Alarm=2.00%FS,
Ch. 2 Trig=2.00%, Detrig=2.00%, Alarm=2.00%FS,
Ch. 3 Trig=2.00%, Detrig=2.00%, Alarm=2.00%FS,
Ch. 4 Trig=2.00%, Detrig=2.00%, Alarm=2.00%FS,
Ch. 5 Trig=2.00%, Detrig=2.00%, Alarm=2.00%FS,
Ch. 6 Trig=2.00%, Detrig=2.00%, Alarm=2.00%FS,
Weights: Keyboard=1, Network=1, External=1
Stream Trigger=1, Detrigger=1
Pre-event: 3 seconds
Post-event: 10 seconds
Entering auto-answer mode.
Primary phone #: 4312814
Alternate #: none
Hanging up...
+++
AT
ATH0
AT&FE0&C1S0=1

Stn: OFF
Weight=1,
Weight=1,
Weight=1,
Weight=1,
Weight=1,
Weight=1,

Offset=0.000
Offset=0.000
Offset=0.000
Offset=0.000
Offset=0.000
Offset=0.000

mv
mv
mv
mv
mv
mv

[AUTO-CALL MODE: PRESS \ TO QUIT]

Response with external modem:

Entering auto-answer mode.
+++
AT
ATH0
AT&FE0&C1S0=1
[AUTO-CALL MODE: PRESS \ TO QUIT]

Page 44

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Response with internal modem:

Entering auto-answer mode.

Also see the modem parameters and the cellular parameters to properly set up this feature.
NOTE: AQ DEBUG and AQ DIAGNOSTICS are forced off by the CALLMODE command.
This command can be password protected.

CD p, CHDIR p
Changes Altus instrument directory. p = pathname. Accepts '..' for 'up one level of directory'. The
full pathname is not required to change to the next level down. To change from the root, A:\, to
A:\EVT, type
Cd evt<cr>

Response:
You are now in directory A:\EVT

Type 'cd<cr>' without the argument to see:

Syntax is: CHDIR pathname

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_CHDIR

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

Not password protected.

CLEAR ALARM
Resets all alarms, same function as ALARM OFF.

CLEAR ALL_LEDS
This command resets the alarms and clears all of the display LEDs.

CLEAR EVENT_LED
This command resets the event LED. In the Application firmware 2.00 or later this command also
resets the number of recorded events to zero. The basename for new event files is not effected.
The forms of these commands are:
Cle ala<cr>
Cle all<cr>
Cle evt<cr>

These commands can be password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 45

COPY sf df
This command copies a file to a new file. sf = source filename df = destination filename. If files
are in different directories use full pathnames. Type the command without any arguments to
display:
Syntax: COPY sourceFile targetFile

To copy an event file from the current directory, A:\EVT\950622, to another directory, type:
Cop xx001.evt a:\evt\950630<cr>

Check the results with the DIR command. (Only available in Monitor mode.) This command can
be password protected.

DEL p
Deletes files from an Altus instrument, K2 or Mt. Whitney. p = pathname, wildcards are
accepted. Same as ERASE. If you are in the directory you want to erase/delete files from, the full
path name is not necessary. Syntax is 'DEL pathname'. To erase an event file while at the root
directory, type:
del a:\evt\950622\test02.evt

Response:
Delete A:\EVT\950622\TEST02.EVT? [(Y)es, (N)o, (D)el all, (Q)uit]: y
Deleting A:\EVT\950622\TEST02.EVT...

Use the DIR command to verify the deletions.

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_DELETEFILE

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

This command can be password protected.

DG
Opens a separate prompt to enter the DIAGNOSTIC commands. Type ABORT or QUIT to exit.
Not password protected, but most of the Diagnostic commands can be password protected. See
the Diagnostic commands. The Diagnostic prompt is 'DG>'.

DIR p
This command displays directories and the contents of directories. With no argument, the DIR
display is the contents of the current directory.
K2 examples:
* dir<cr>
Directory of A:
Volume Label: "ALTUS_K2
TMP
<DIR>
EVT
<DIR>
K2
PAR
2.0 kb
2040 bytes in 3 file(s)

Page 46

", Volume S/N: A91E-2C5D

1995-06-06 17:16
1995-06-06 17:18
1995-06-16 07:31
(4604 kb free)

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

* dir a:\evt<cr>
Directory of A:\EVT
Volume Label: "ALTUS_K2
", Volume S/N: A91E-2C5D
<DIR>
1995-06-06 17:18
<DIR>
1995-06-06 17:18
950606
<DIR>
1995-06-06 17:18
950612
<DIR>
1995-06-12 15:25
950613
<DIR>
1995-06-13 08:13
800101
<DIR>
1980-01-01 00:09
0 bytes in 6 file(s) (4428 kb free)
* dir<cr>
Directory of A:\EVT\950612
Volume Label: "ALTUS_K2
", Volume S/N: A91E-2C5D
<DIR>
1995-06-12 15:25
<DIR>
1995-06-12 15:25
LS001
EVT
37.3 kb 1995-06-12 15:25
A
38188 bytes in 3 file(s) (4428 kb free)

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_OPENDIR
PKC_GETDIR
PKC_CLOSEDIR

Response Packet
PKR_ACK
PKR_DIR
PKR_ACK

Not password protected.

DISPLAY BITMAP
Displays the current channel bit map, plus channel related triggering information such as trigger
type, trigger threshold, detrigger threshold, alarm thresholds, votes, and offset.
The second column is used to indicate channel mapping. The values in the 'P' column indicate
which physical channel the data for the recorded channel came from. In the example given below,
no remapping has been done, since the data for channel 1 comes from physical channel 1 and so
on.
See the EDIT mode BITMAP and CHANNEL commands for details.
Example:
* dis bit<cr>
6 Channel(s) Selected: 1 2 3 4 5 6
Channel
Trigger
Threshold
Pch Lch ID
Type Filter Trig
DeTrig
1
1
Sta/Lta
B 2.000% 2.000%
2
2
Thresh.
B 2.000% 2.000%
3
3
Thresh.
B 2.000% 2.000%
4
4
Thresh.
B 2.000% 2.000%
5
5
Thresh.
B 2.000% 2.000%
6
6
Thresh.
B 2.000% 2.000%

LTA/STA
STA LTA Ratio DeTrig
1.0 60
4.0
40%
1.0 60
4.0
40%
1.0 60
4.0
40%
1.0 60
4.0
40%
1.0 60
4.0
40%
1.0 60
4.0
40%

Alarm Offset
2.000% 0.000mV
2.000% 0.000mV
2.000% 0.000mV
2.000% 0.000mV
2.000% 0.000mV
2.000% 0.000mV

Not password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 47

DISPLAY CHANNEL
Displays channel information for all channels. The information displayed includes full scale
voltage, gain, and positional information North, East, Up, Altitude and Azimuth.
See the EDIT mode CHANNEL commands for details.
Example:
* dis cha<cr>
Ch F.S. Votes Gain
1 2.50
1
1
2 2.50
1
1
3 2.50
1
1
4 2.50
1
1
5 2.50
1
1
6 2.50
1
1

North
0
0
0
0
0
0

East
0
0
0
0
0
0

Up Alt. Azm.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Not password protected.

DISPLAY MODEM
Displays modem parameters, including all setup strings retry times and counters (described
below), and cellular setup parameters.
See EDIT mode MODEM commands for details.
Example:
* dis mod<cr>
Modem Initialization Command: AT&FE0&C1S0=1&W
Modem Dialing Prefix: ATDT
Modem Dialing Suffix:
Modem Hangup Command: ATH0
Modem Auto Answer On: ATS0=1
Modem Auto Answer Off: ATS0=0
Modem Acknowledge:
Event Alert Primary Phone #:
NONE
Event Alert Alternate Phone #:
NONE
Modem Wait For Connection = 45 sec
Modem Pause Between Calls = 10 sec
Modem Extend_Pause = 0 min
Modem Max Dial Attempts = 10
MODEM CHECKIN_TIME = OFF
Answer mode on
Internal cellular trigger control disabled, duration.
Cellular MODEM power control disabled.
CELLULAR ON 1 = OFF
CELLULAR ON 2 = OFF
CELLULAR ON 3 = OFF
CELLULAR ON 4 = OFF
CELLULAR ON 5 = OFF
CELLULAR DURATION = 0
CELLULAR WARMUP = 0
CALLOUT_MSG:

Not password protected.

Page 48

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

DISPLAY RWMISC
Displays miscellaneous read/write recorder parameters. These parameters include the serial
number, number of active channels, location information, UTC offset, GPS and IRIG timing
information, and user codes.
See EDIT mode SITEID, COMMENT, SERIALNUMBER, NCHANNELS, LOCATION,
UTCOFFSET, GPS, IRIG_TYPE, BUF256, and USERCODE commands for details.
Example:
* dis rwm<cr>
Number of channels: 6
Serial number: 101
Location: 0.00000 N, 0.00000 E, 0 meters
Station ID:
Site ID:
Comment: DEFAULT PARAMETERS
UTC offset: 0 hours
GPS will be turned on every 30 minutes
GPS will be powered for a maximum of 30 minutes
GPS state of control bits = FREE FIELD
Irig Type Code = 1
User codes: [0] [0] [0] [0] [0]
File Buffer Size: Dynamic (0)

Not password protected.

DISPLAY SENSOR
Displays sensor information for all channels. The information displayed includes sensitivity,
natural frequency, damping, type of sensor, sensor gain (1,2,4 or 8 - EpiSensor only), range code
(1-5 - EpiSensor only), cal coil sensitivity (g/volt - EpiSensor only), and sensor serial number.
Also indicates whether sensor types are automatically determined or set manually.
See the EDIT mode CHANNEL commands for details.
Example:
* dis sen<cr>
Ch Sens
N F Damping Type Gain Range Cal Coil
1 1.250
0.00 0.0000
0
4
0
0.0500
2 1.250
0.00 0.0000
0
4
0
0.0500
3 1.250
0.00 0.0000
0
4
0
0.0500
4 1.250 51.40 0.6400 32
4
2
0.0510
5 1.250 53.60 0.6700 32
4
2
0.0520
6 1.250 51.20 0.6500 32
4
2
0.0530
Sensor types: Auto-determined (CHA FIX 0)

s/n
0
0
0
35332
35333
35334

For a discussion of the sensor type and EpiSensor sensitivity determination, see the section titled
Sensor Type and Sensitivity Determination.
Not password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 49

DISPLAY SERIAL_DATA_STREAM
Displays Serial Data Streams (SDS) parameters. These parameters include number of SDS
channels, SDS format, timeout, SDS buffer size, and SDS sample rate.
See EDIT mode SDS commands for details.
Example:
* dis ser<cr>
*** SERIAL DATA STREAM PARAMETERS
6 Channel(s) Selected: 1 2 3 4 5 6
Stream Format = 1
Stream Timeout = 0
Stream Buffer Size = 64 blocks, 1048576 bytes
Stream Sample Rate = 0 samples per second.

Not password protected.

DISPLAY STREAM
Displays stream and DFS parameters. Parameters displayed include sampling rate, array
propagation, pre-event, post-event, minimum run time, trigger and detrigger thresholds, vote
channel weights, DFS channels selected, DFS baud rate, DFS decimation factor, and DFS
protocol code.
See EDIT mode STREAM and DFS commands for details.
Example:
* dis str<cr>
*** STREAM PARAMETERS
Sampling rate = 200 sps
Array propagation window = 0 sec.
Pre-event = 3 sec.
Post-event = 10 sec.
Minimum run time = 0 sec.
Trigger threshold = 1, Detrigger threshold = 1 votes
Voters (weight):
Ch. 1 (1), Ch. 2 (1), Ch. 3 (1), Ch. 4 (1),
Ch. 5 (1), Ch. 6 (1), Ch. 7 (1), Ch. 8 (1),
Ch. 9 (1), Ch. 10 (1), Ch. 11 (1), Ch. 12 (1),
Network (1), Keyboard (1), External (1)
Primary storage is drive A:
Secondary storage is drive A:
Filter type non-causal.
*** DFS PARAMETERS
0 Channel(s) Selected:
Digital Field Station Baudrate Code = 0
Digital Field Station Protocol Code = 0
Digital Field Station Decimation Factor Code = 0

Not password protected.

Page 50

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

DISPLAY WRITE file

Displays all instrument parameters from the parameter block and the serial EEPROM to a
specified file using the mechanisms provided by the DISPLAY commands. The specified file will
be created as a text file which can then be retrieved by your communication software such as
QuickTalk.
Sample DISPLAY WRITE command, without file name:
* dis wri
Syntax: DISPLAY WRITE filename

Sample DISPLAY WRITE command with file name:

* dis wri parm.txt
*

Sample contents of created PARM.TXT file:

6 Channel(s) Selected: 1 2 3 4 5 6
*** CHANNEL TRIGGER PARAMETERS
Channel
Trigger
Threshold
LTA/STA
Pch Lch ID
Type Filter Trig
DeTrig STA LTA Ratio DeTrig
1
1
Sta/Lta
B 2.000% 2.000% 1.0 60
4.0
40%
2
2
Thresh.
B 2.000% 2.000% 1.0 60
4.0
40%
3
3
Thresh.
B 2.000% 2.000% 1.0 60
4.0
40%
4
4
Thresh.
B 2.000% 2.000% 1.0 60
4.0
40%
5
5
Thresh.
B 2.000% 2.000% 1.0 60
4.0
40%
6
6
Thresh.
B 2.000% 2.000% 1.0 60
4.0
40%
*** CHANNEL PARAMETERS
Ch F.S. Votes Gain
North
East
Up Alt. Azm.
1 20.00
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
2 20.00
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
3 20.00
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
4 20.00
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
5 20.00
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
6 20.00
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
*** CHANNEL SENSOR PARAMETERS
Ch Sens
N F Damping Type Gain Range Cal Coil
s/n
1 10.000
0.00 0.0000
0
4
0
0.0500
0
2 10.000
0.00 0.0000
0
4
0
0.0500
0
3 10.000
0.00 0.0000
0
4
0
0.0500
0
4 10.000
0.00 0.0000 32
4
2
0.0500
0
5 10.000
0.00 0.0000 32
4
2
0.0500
0
6 10.000
0.00 0.0000 32
4
2
0.0500
0
Sensor types: Auto-determined (CHA FIX 0)
*** MODEM PARAMETERS
Modem Initialization Command: AT&FE0&C1S0=1&W
Modem Dialing Prefix: ATDT
Modem Dialing Suffix:
Modem Hangup Command: ATH0
Modem Auto Answer On: ATS0=1
Modem Auto Answer Off: ATS0=0
Modem Acknowledge:
Event Alert Primary Phone #:
NONE
Event Alert Alternate Phone #:
NONE
Modem Wait For Connection = 45 sec
Modem Pause Between Calls = 10 sec
Modem Extend_Pause = 0 min
Modem Max Dial Attempts = 10
MODEM CHECKIN_TIME = OFF

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Alarm Offset
2.000% 0.000mV
2.000% 0.000mV
2.000% 0.000mV
2.000% 0.000mV
2.000% 0.000mV
2.000% 0.000mV

Page 51

Answer mode on
Internal cellular trigger control disabled, duration.
Cellular MODEM power control disabled.
CELLULAR ON 1 = OFF
CELLULAR ON 2 = OFF
CELLULAR ON 3 = OFF
CELLULAR ON 4 = OFF
CELLULAR ON 5 = OFF
CELLULAR DURATION = 0
CELLULAR WARMUP = 0
CALLOUT_MSG:
*** MISC R/W PARAMETERS
Number of channels: 6
Serial number: 101
Location: 0.00000 N, 0.00000 E, 0 meters
Station ID:
Site ID:
Comment: DEFAULT PARAMETERS
UTC offset: 0 hours
GPS will be turned on every 30 minutes
GPS will be powered for a maximum of 30 minutes
GPS state of control bits = FREE FIELD
Irig Type Code = 1
User codes: [0] [0] [0] [0] [0]
File Buffer Size: Dynamic (0)
*** STREAM PARAMETERS
Sampling rate = 200 sps
Array propagation window = 0 sec.
Pre-event = 3 sec.
Post-event = 10 sec.
Minimum run time = 0 sec.
Trigger threshold = 1, Detrigger threshold = 1 votes
Voters (weight):
Ch. 1 (1), Ch. 2 (1), Ch. 3 (1), Ch. 4 (1),
Ch. 5 (1), Ch. 6 (1), Ch. 7 (1), Ch. 8 (1),
Ch. 9 (1), Ch. 10 (1), Ch. 11 (1), Ch. 12 (1),
Network (1), Keyboard (1), External (1)
Primary storage is drive A:
Secondary storage is drive A:
Filter type non-causal.
*** DFS PARAMETERS
0 Channel(s) Selected:
Digital Field Station Baudrate Code = 0
Digital Field Station Protocol Code = 0
Digital Field Station Decimation Factor Code = 0
*** SERIAL DATA STREAM PARAMETERS
6 Channel(s) Selected: 1 2 3 4 5 6
Stream Format = 1
Stream Timeout = 0
Stream Buffer Size = 64 blocks, 1048576 bytes
Stream Sample Rate = 0 samples per second.
*** EEPROM PARAMETERS
Baud rate = 57600
Alarm Duration: 0 seconds
SYSTEM LOG: 0
GPS Pulse count = 3
AutoBaud Rate Enabled
Event counter will not be cleared on restart.
AUTO_FILE_DELETE off
GPS averaging off
GPS Dynamics mode = 1, Elevation Angle = 4.0, Signal level mask = 2.2,
PDOP Mask = 12.0, PDOP Switch = 5.0

Page 52

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

File system type = Tree

Not password protected.

EDIT
Enter the Parameter Editor. See the Parameter Editor commands. The Parameter Editor prompt is
'EDIT>'. Use ABORT (cancel changes) or QUIT (save changes) to exit.

ERASE p
Erase a file or series of files in the Altus instrument. SAME as DEL. See DEL.

FORMAT d
Formats and erases a new PCMCIA hard drive or SanDisk. d = drivename. The Altus
instruments, K2 and Mt. Whitney, use a special format different from the FORMAT found on a
PC. This special format allows faster disk writes and is readable by most PCs. NOTE: DATA
LOSS MAY RESULT IF YOU ATTEMPT TO USE A PC FORMATTED PCMCIA CARD IN
AN ALTUS SERIES RECORDER. The WIPEDISK command is normally used to erase all files
on a PCMCIA hard drive or SanDisk. (Only available in Monitor mode) The form of the
command is:
* for a:

The response is:

Quick format drive A:? y
Caution: All data on this disk is about to be destroyed.
Enter 'destroy' to continue or <CR> to exit: destroy
Format Complete

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_FORMAT

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

Note: PKC_FORMAT is NOT used by QuickTalk(r) for Windows.

This command can be password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 53

HELP
This command displays the main commands. The form of the command is:
Hel<cr>

The response:
Commands:
A:
AUTOBAUD
BAUDRATE
CD
COPY
DIR
ERASE
MD
PW
RENAME
STATUS
TIME
WIPEDISK

ALARM
AQ
BLOCKMODE
CHDIR
DEL
DISPLAY
FORMAT
MKDIR
RD
RMDIR
SUMMARY
TX

ANSWERMODE
B:
CALLMODE
CLEAR
DG
EDIT
HELP
PASSWORD
RELEASE
RX
SYSTEM
VERSION

ALARM, AQ and CLEAR entered alone will display their commands:

* ala<cr>
Commands:
ON

OFF

DURATION

* aq<cr>
Commands:
AUTO_DELETE
DIAGNOSTICS
FT
PEAK

DEBUG
DVM
ON
SRT

DETRIGGER
FILE
OFF
TRIGGER

* cle<cr>
Commands:
ALARM

ALL_LEDS

EVENT_LED

Not password protected.

MD p, MKDIR p
This command makes a new directory. p = pathname. If you are in the directory that is just above
the new directory, a full pathname is not required. The form of the command is:
*md a:\test<cr>

Use the DIR command to verify the results.

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_MKDIR

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

Note: The PKC_MKDIR packet is not used by QuickTalk(r) for Windows.

This command can be password protected.

Page 54

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

NET p
Network port enable or disable. (Only available with K2 or Makalu internal Network Option
Board). p = 0 (Network disabled), p = 1 (Network enabled).
This command enables or disables the network connection at next boot. The purpose of the
command is to allow setting of the active port to be selected at startup so that either the front
panel port or the network connection may be selected. See Application Note 48 for details.
Control may be "taken" from either port by typing a sequence of four backslashes. This may need
to be repeated until communication is established.
The inactive port will monitor the communications channel for this sequence and will take control
of the communications channel. This "take control" sequence may be performed from either port.
Once you have taken control of the communication channel, you may then communicate with the
instrument in the usual manner. When you are finished, you may simply disconnect as a fiveminute timeout will return the communications channel to that previously set by the "NET"
command.
The default setting is "NET 0", which disables the network connection at boot and selects the
front panel RS-232 port.
The NET command may not be used with an internal modem.
This command can be password protected.

PASSWORD w, PW p
Use this command to enter or change the password. w = current password. To use the password
and have access to commands that are protected type the command and the current password:
*pw kmitest<cr>

If the password is incorrect, the instrument will respond:

Incorrect password.

To change the password from the default, "", empty string, type the command 'pas new' or 'pw
new', type just a <cr> for the old password and then type in the new password:
*pas new<cr>
Enter old password: <cr>
Enter new password (8 chars max): XXXXXXXX<cr>

If the old password is incorrect, the command will terminate with the above 'Incorrect password'
message.
BLOCK mode:

March, 2006

Command Packet
PKC_PASSWORD

Document 302219 Rev P

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

Page 55

RELEASE
This command is used for test purposes and is not intended for general use. When a PCMCIA
modem is installed this command will release the current communications path, either the serial
connector on front panel or the modem connector, to the other one. Three backslashes, '\\\' will
get the path back.
Not password protected.

RENAME ofn nfn

This command will rename an event file in the Altus instrument. ofn = old filename, nfn = new
filename. You should be in the same directory as the file you are renaming. The form of the
command is:
Ren bw004.evt sta12004.evt

Use the DIR command to verify the results. (Only available in Monitor Mode). This command
can be password protected.

RD p, RMDIR p
Remove/delete an empty Altus instrument directory. p = pathname. The directory being removed
must be empty. (Only available in Monitor mode) Forms of the command are:
* rd 950606
Error removing directory A:\950606
Error 5: ENTRY NOT FOUND
* rd evt\950606
Error removing directory A:\EVT\950606
Error 27: SUBDIR NOT EMPTY
* rd a:\test<cr>

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_RMDIR

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

Note: This packet command is not used by QuickTalk(r) for Windows.

This command can be password protected.

Page 56

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

RX fn
Receive a file from the PC using XMODEM CRC transfer protocol and write it to the instrument
PCMCIA hard drive or SanDisk.. fn = Altus filename or pathname. Use in conjunction with
QuickTalk(r) Transfer Menu item XMODEM SEND or other communication program's
XMODEM CRC transmit command. Type this command first, then go to the communication
program's command line and enter its transmit command and the name of the file to transfer from
the PC. For example to receive a .PAR binary parameter file, type:
Rx a:\new.par<cr>

Use the DIR command to verify the transfer when the communications program is done. Use the
LOAD command in the Parameter Editor to enter the .PAR file parameters into the instrument.
BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_SET PARMS

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

Note: The BLOCK mode packets do not use the XMODEM CRC protocol.
NOTE: AQ DEBUG and AQ DIAGNOSTICS are forced off by the RX command.
This command can be password protected.

STATUS
This command displays an instrument status screen. It can NOT be password protected. See the
list of reset status codes. [Application firmware 2.00: the STATUS is no longer automatically
included in a instrument initiated telephone message.] To see the display, type:
Sta<cr>

Typical K2 or Mt. Whitney response:

Status for Recorder SKMI S/N 970
Restart Counts: 1031 (reset status: 20)
Restart Time: May 10, 2000 16:16:12.000
Current Time: May 11, 2000 09:02:44.000 (GPS)
Last GPS Lock: May 11, 2000 09:02:04.000
GPS: ON (locked)
Events: 159 (Errors: 0)
Acquisition: ON (NOT TRIGGERED)
Alarm: TRIGGERED
Battery: 13.4 V
Temperature: 26.7 C
PEM Banks: 1
Drive A: 4 MB FREE B: No Card

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 57

GPS Information:
GPS: ON (locked)
GPS:

GPS:
GPS:
GPS:
GPS:

GPS:

GPS:

GPS module is on, clock source is GPS, and GPS

is locked; time is valid
ON (unlocked)
- GPS module is on, clock source is GPS, and GPS
is unlocked; use last GPS lock time to evaluate
time quality
ON
- GPS module is on, clock source is not GPS
OFF
- GPS module is off; if clock source is GPS, use
last GPS lock time to evaluate time quality
NONE
- GPS module not detected during boot
SLAVE (locked)
- GPS is in slave mode and is getting time packets
from the GPS master. Slave is locked to the
master
SLAVE (unlocked) - GPS is in slave mode and is NOT getting time
packets from the GPS master. Slave is NOT
locked to the master
SLAVE
- GPS slave mode but has not yet NOT gotten time
from the master

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_GETSTATUS

Response Packet
PKR_STATUS

Not password protected.

SUMMARY [p] [x]

This command displays details of the events in the current directory or the directory specified by
pathname, p. Optionally, the parameter x specifies the form of the extended summary as follows:
Syntax: SUMMARY [drive:][path]filename|wildcards [x] (x=1 extended summary, x=2 raw
summary)
-- or -Syntax: SUMMARY [drive:]path[filename|wildcards] [x] (x=1 extended summary, x=2 raw
summary)
In the regular summary (no x), peaks are uncorrected (not mean removed) and displayed as a
fraction of full scale.
* sum a:\<cr>
Summary of Events in A:\*
* sum a:\evt<cr>
Summary of Events in A:\EVT\*
* sum a:\evt\960609<cr>
Summary of Events in A:\EVT\950627\*
File: A:\EVT\960609\BJ005.EVT
Trigger Time: Jun 9, 1996 20:44:48.800 2 Channel(s) Triggered: 1 3
Runtime: 218.0 seconds, Scans: 43522
Ch. 1 NS11 Peaks: -0.0226 0.1007 (x fullscale)
Ch. 2 UD11 Peaks: -0.0376 0.0882 (x fullscale)
Ch. 3 EW11 Peaks: -0.0465 0.0849 (x fullscale)
Ch. 4 EXT Peaks: -0.0000 0.0000 (x fullscale)
[More] (C=Continuous, Q=Quit, Any other key to continue)

Page 58

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

File: A:\EVT\960609\BJ006.EVT
Trigger Time: Jun 9, 1996 20:55:15.600 Keyboard Trigger
Runtime: 14.0 seconds, Scans: 2768
Ch. 1 NS11 Peaks: -0.0228 0.0965 (x fullscale)
Ch. 2 UD11 Peaks: -0.0298 0.0743 (x fullscale)
Ch. 3 EW11 Peaks: -0.0378 0.0622 (x fullscale)
Ch. 4 EXT Peaks: -0.0000 0.0000 (x fullscale)
[More] (C=Continuous, Q=Quit, Any other key to continue)
File: A:\EVT\960609\BJ007.EVT
Trigger Time: Jun 27, 1995 20:59:06.400 (SRT)
Runtime: 63.1 seconds, Scans: 12618
Ch. 1 NS11 Peaks: -0.0126 0.0783 (x fullscale)
Ch. 2 UD11 Peaks: -0.0315 0.0499 (x fullscale)
Ch. 3 EW11 Peaks: -0.0357 0.0729 (x fullscale)
Ch. 4 EXT Peaks: -0.0000 0.0000 (x fullscale)
[More] (C=Continuous, Q=Quit, Any other key to continue)

In the extended summary (x = 1), peaks are displayed as mean-corrected peaks in units of
V/sensitivity. For systems with sensitivity units in V/g, the result is in g's. Position is reported, if
available.
In the raw summary (x = 2), peaks are displayed as a fraction of full scale, but at higher resolution
than the regular summary. Added data fields include the mean, gain, full-scale value, and
sensitivity. Position is reported, if available.
Selected systems support Imm summary mode (x = 3). In this mode, the system computes an
estimate of the Modified Mercalli Intensity (Imm) based on the maximum mean removed peak
according to the formula:
Imm = C1 * log(PGA) - C2

Peak is displayed in cm/s**2. For Imm summary mode to work, the following criteria must be
met:
- The instrument type must support this feature
- Firmware must be application version 3.03 or later
- Full scale range and sensitivities must be properly set for all channels
- A file A:\imm.txt must exist, containing two lines with the C1 and C2 constants
Positions in the raw and extended summaries are reported in decreasing order of accuracy based
on position quality. A label states their type: averaged position, last position (single position), no
position available.
Examples:
sum on*
Summary of Events in A:\EVT\ON*
File: A:\EVT\ON1152.EVT
Trigger Time: May 16, 2000 07:05:09.300 (FT)
Runtime: 15.0 seconds, Scans: 3000
Ch. 1 KMIL Peaks: -0.0177 0.0949 (x fullscale)
Ch. 2 KMIV Peaks: -0.0429 0.0785 (x fullscale)
Ch. 3 KMIT Peaks: -0.0335 0.0867 (x fullscale)
[More] (C=Continuous, Q=Quit, Any other key to continue)

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 59

* sum on* 1
Summary of Events in A:\EVT\ON*
File: A:\EVT\ON1152.EVT
Trigger Time: May 16, 2000 07:05:09.300 (FT)
Runtime: 15.0 seconds, Scans: 3000
Ch ID
Mean-Corrected Peaks
Min
Max
1 KMIL -0.055040
0.170048
2 KMIV -0.061609
0.181003
3 KMIT -0.068211
0.172091
Averaged Position: 34.148624N -118.102417E 205m
[More] (C=Continuous, Q=Quit, Any other key to continue)
* sum on* 2
Summary of Events in A:\EVT\ON*
File: A:\EVT\ON1152.EVT
Trigger Time: May 16, 2000 07:05:09.300 (FT)
Runtime: 15.0 seconds, Scans: 3000
Ch ID
Peaks (FFS)
Mean (FFS) Gain FS (V)
Min
Max
1 KMIL -0.017657
0.094887
0.009863
1
2.50
2 KMIV -0.042852
0.078454 -0.012048
1
2.50
3 KMIT -0.033466
0.086685
0.000639
1
2.50
Averaged Position: 34.148624N -118.102417E 205m
[More] (C=Continuous, Q=Quit, Any other key to continue)

Sens (V/unit)
1.250
1.250
1.250

* sum pr006.evt 3
Summary of Events in A:\EVT\PR006.EVT
File: A:\EVT\PR006.EVT
Trigger Time: Jan 04, 2005 14:45:25.900 1 Channel(s) Triggered: 3
Runtime: 8.0 seconds, Scans: 400
Averaged Position: 34.148624N -118.102417E 205m
Peak: 95.931 Imm: 5.5
[More] (C=Continuous, Q=Quit, Any other key to continue)

NOTE: The Summary command should only be used to examine EVT files recorded by the
same type of recorder. If you attempt to (for example) take the summaries of files recorded
on a K2 by placing the storage card in an Etna, an "invalid header" message will result.
Not password protected.

Page 60

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

SYSTEM LOAD
Exits to the bootloader without resetting the processor. This command is useful with internal
modems to allow remote update of firmware via an internal modem. (Only available in Monitor
mode, Application firmware version 2.88 or later).
To use the SYSTEM LOAD command to update firmware via an internal modem:
- Call the Altus unit and connect to it via it's internal modem.
- Enter the SYSTEM LOAD command to enter the bootloader.
- Proceed with the firmware update procedure over the internal modem as if you were connected
to the Altus directly via RS-232.
Syntax: SYSTEM LOAD
Response to SYSTEM LOAD command:
* system load
*** SYSTEM RESET ***
Boot Loader Program P/N 302290 for New MCU P/N 109445.
Version 1.10
Last revised: September 18, 1998
(c)Kinemetrics, Inc. 1998
Press <Space> to enter Boot Loader
Press any other key to run Application Program.
....

There is no difference in the initial instrument response whether the command is sent to the front
panel serial port or internal modem.
When the SYSTEM LOAD command is sent, the instrument stores modem setup data in the
serial EEPROM. The boot loader uses this data to determine if an internal modem is installed.
When setup data is detected, the boot loader timeout is extended from 10 seconds to 10 minutes
and the internal MODEM will be setup to answer if the connection is lost.
This means that if you are remotely loading firmware and the connection is lost, you can call the
recorder back within 10 minutes and resume the firmware loading process. If you do not call back
within 10 minutes, the Altus will attempt to start the application firmware. If starting the
application firmware is unsuccessful, the Altus recorder will remain in the bootloader and will
continue to monitor incoming calls on the internal modem.
Once the application firmware has been succesfully started, the setup data for the modem is
cleared, and the Altus will communicate normally via the front panel using standard timeouts.
NOTE 1: When the setup data is present, the modem must not be removed or changed. If this is
done, the instrument may not function until the change is corrected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 61

NOTE 2: The bootloader "X" menu selection and the normal bootloader timeout will not reset
the recorder, but will restart the bootloader code only, allowing continued remote communication.
If you use the "Q" command while connected remotely through a MODEM, the bootloader will
warn you before resetting the processor.
NOTE 3: If you use an external MODEM to download firmware, the SYSTEM LOAD command
can still be used, but once the application firmware has been erased and the recorder is in the
bootloader it will not be possible to call the recorder remotely if the connection is lost. This is
because the MODEM's status messages will be echoed by the bootloader menus and will cause
the MODEM abort any attempted connections. This behavior is the same as with previous
versions of the Altus firmware because the problem is caused by the external modem itself. If the
remote connection via an external modem to the recorder is lost after erasing application code, the
instrument will require a site visit to again be usable.
NOTE 4: SYSTEM LOAD command issues for Mt. Whitney: When using the SYSTEM
LOAD command with a Mt. Whitney using an internal MODEM or any MODEM that uses the
external cellular power control (CPPC) signal, the Mt. Whitney must not be permitted to reset
without valid application code installed. This is because the PCMCIA interface and the cellular
power control signal are controlled by an LCA that is programmed by the application code. Any
reset (caused by the System Reset bootloader menu selection or by other means) will cause the
cellular power control signal to be turned off and the PCMCIA interface to be disabled. If there is
no application code, the cellular power control signal and the PCMCIA interface will not be
turned back on. If the Mt. Whitney processor is reset after erasing the application code, the
instrument will require a site visit to again be usable.

SYSTEM LOG
This command controls logging of call out attempts and other items to a system log file.
Syntax: SYSTEM LOG x (0=off (default), 1=on)
When System Log is on, the text file system.log (in the root directory) will have an entry
appended for each call out attempt (or other items) by the recorder. These entries are formatted as
follows:
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS Call CALL_NUMBER message CALL_OUT_CODE

The time stamp "MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS" is the time of the log entry. "Call" is the reason: a
call out was attempted as one or more of the call out criteria was met.
CALL_NUMBER is the number of the call attempt.
Message meanings, as follows:
Fail Connect:
- If the modem connect message was not received within MODEM WAIT seconds of modem dial
out.

Page 62

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Connect:
- If the modem connect message was received within MODEM WAIT seconds of modem dial out
(modem connected), AND
- If MODEM ACKNOWLEDGE was not required.
Connect Ack:
- If modem connected, AND
- If MODEM ACKNOWLEDGE was required and received within the timeout period.
Fail Ack:
- If modem connected, AND
- If MODEM ACKNOWLEDGE was required but was not received within the timeout period.
Complete:
- If modem connected, AND
- If MODEM COMPLETE_CALLOUT was required and ANSWERMODE or CALLMODE
command is issued to hang up within the timeout period.
CALL_OUT_CODE - a hex code containing the sum of call-out reason(s):
0002
0004
0008
0010
0020
0040
4000
8000

BATTERY LOW (battery voltage low)

BATTERY NOT CHARGING (loss of AC power)
EXTREME TEMPERATURE
NEW EVENT(S) RECORDED
GPS FAILED TO LOCK
ALARM THRESHOLD EXCEEDED
DAILY CHECK IN
SYSTEM ERROR

SYSTEM LOG EXAMPLE (with MODEM COMPLETE_CALLOUT & MODEM

ACKNOWLEDGE enabled):
3/23/00 Call Attempts: Call attempts 1 & 2 did not connect. Call attempt 3 connected and
MODEM ACKNOWLEDGE received, but system times out & hangs up. Call attempt 4
connected, MODEM ACKNOWLEDGE not received, but ANSWERMODE or CALLMODE
issued.
3/27/00 Call Attempts: Call attempt 1 connected and ANSWERMODE or CALLMODE issued.
Contents of SYSTEM.LOG:
03/23/00
03/23/00
03/23/00
03/23/00
03/23/00
03/27/00
03/27/00

March, 2006

16:42:24
16:44:00
16:45:25
16:48:47
16:49:08
02:17:54
02:19:33

Call
Call
Call
Call
Call
Call
Call

1
2
3
4
4
1
1

Fail Connect 0010

Fail Connect 0010
Connect Ack 0010
Fail Ack 0010
Complete 0010
Connect Ack 0010
Complete 0010

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 63

SYSTEM RESET
This command resets the Altus instrument. There is a delay of approximately 10 seconds from
when the command is issued to when the instrument comes out of reset. An example of a K2
instrument reset follows:
* sys res<cr>
*** SYSTEM RESET ***
K2 System Block Version 0.01
Boot Loader Program (B) Version 1.31
Last revised: January 13, 1995
Press <Space> to enter Boot Loader
Press any other key to run Application Program.
Checking Application Program...
Executing Application Program...
K2 STRONG MOTION SOFTWARE 02.88
6 Channels. P/N 302173.
Copyright (c) 2000 Kinemetrics, Inc.
Last Revised: December 30, 1998
Initializing clocks...
RTC Time: Jan 01, 1980 00:02:27.000
*** CAUTION: Clock may not have correct time.
Initializing GPS board...
DSP Boards: 2, DSP Channels: 6
Initializing Drive A: ... READY
Initializing Drive B: ... NOT READY
Loading user parameters from eeprom
PARAMETER COMMENT: DEFAULT PARAMETERS
Starting acquisition...
Channels: 6, Sampling Rate: 200, Digital Field Stn: OFF
Ch. Type
Trig
Detrig STA LTA Ratio DeTrig Alarm Weight
1: 1 STA/LTA
1.0 60
4.0 40%
2.000%FS
1
2: 2 Th.
2.000%FS 2.000%FS
2.000%FS
1
3: 3 Th.
2.000%FS 2.000%FS
2.000%FS
1
4: 4 Th.
2.000%FS 2.000%FS
2.000%FS
1
5: 5 Th.
2.000%FS 2.000%FS
2.000%FS
1
6: 6 Th.
2.000%FS 2.000%FS
2.000%FS
1
Weights: Keyboard=1, Network=1, External=1
Stream Trigger=1, Detrigger=1
Pre-event: 3 seconds
PEM: 334 frames/bank, 334 total frames
Post-event: 10 seconds
Task 9 stack: 547 free, 547 min free
EventMgrTask: 10
Task 10 stack: 781 free, 781 min free
Stream scan rate 0.
Serial Data Streaming disabled
Entering auto-answer mode.
Hanging up...

Offset
0.000mv
0.000mv
0.000mv
0.000mv
0.000mv
0.000mv

This command can be password protected.

Page 64

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

TIME y,m,d,h,mn,s
This command enter a new time into the Altus instrument. y = year (1994+), m = month (1-12), d
= date (1-31), h = hour (0-23), mn = minute (0-59), s = second (0-59). Enter time several seconds
ahead. Any key becomes the timemark. The form of the command is:
* time 1995 6 28 10 36 10<cr> You cannot use this command while acquisition is
enabled.
* aq off<cr> Stopping acquisition...
* time 1995 6 28 10 36 30<cr> Press any key to start clocks...<spacebar>
Jun 28, 1995 10:36:32.000
* aq on<cr>

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_TIME

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

This command can be password protected.

TX fn [H] [K] [T] [channel list]

This command transfers a file from the Altus instrument to a PC using XMODEM CRC protocol.
fn = Altus filename. Use in conjunction with QuickTalk(r) transfer Menu item XMODEM
Receive or another communications program's XMODEM CRC receive command. After entering
the TX command, switch to the communications program and issue its receive command. This
command can be used to transfer to the PC a .PAR file that was saved to the instrument PCMCIA
hard drive or SanDisk with the EDIT SAVE command.
Command line switches (Application firmware 2.00 or later):
H
K

T
Channel list

March, 2006

Transmits the event file tag & header only. If an H is entered as a command line
switch, all other switches except K are ignored.
Uses the XMODEM-1K protocol to improve speed of file transfers. Can be used
in combination with any other switches. End of file is padded with zeros to a 1024
byte boundary.
Truncates 23-bit data to 16-bit data before transmission. Can be used in
combination with any other switches except H.
A space delimited list of channels to include in the transferred file. For example,
'TX filename 1 4 5 6 17<cr>' will transmit the requested channels provided they
were recorded in the event file. If some of the requested channels were not
recorded, you will be asked if you want to continue with the available channels.
If none of the requested channels were recorded, you will be returned to the '*'
prompt with an error message. In both cases a message line will show which
channels are being included in the transferred event file. A retrieved channel
subset file has the .EVT extension and the full event file is still in the instrument
with its archive bit set, indicating that the full file has not been transferred.

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 65

The form of the command is:

* tx a:\sta003.par<cr>
* tx b:\bj001.evt 1 4 17 k 6 t 5<cr>

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_OPENFILE
PKC_GETFILE
PKC_CLOSEFILE
PKC_GETPARMS

Response Packet
PKR_ACK
PKR_FILE
PKR_ACK
PKR_PARMS

Note: The BLOCK mode packets do not use the XMODEM CRC protocol.
NOTE: AQ DEBUG and AQ DIAGNOSTICS are forced off by the TX command.
This command can be password protected.

VERSION
This command displays the version numbers of the installed firmware. The form of the command
is:
* ver<cr>

A typical response:
K2 Strong Motion Software 02.88
4/6/12 Channels. P/N 302292.
Copyright (c) 2000 Kinemetrics, Inc.
Last Revised: September 12, 2000
Boot Block Version 01.11

Please note that as of Application version 2.88, the Application and DSP blocks are now
combined into a single image, so the DSP version number is no longer displayed by the VER
command. If you need to know the DSP version number, you can use the VER KMI command,
that will display as follows:
K2 Strong Motion Software 02.88
4/6/12 Channels. P/N 302292.
Copyright (c) 2000 Kinemetrics, Inc.
Last Revised: September 12, 2000
KMI Internal Version: v2.88.130
DSP Block Version 08.89
Boot Block Version 01.11

Not password protected.

Page 66

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

WIPEDISK d
This command will erase the contents of the installed PCMCIA hard drive or SanDisk. The form
of the command is:
* wip a:<cr>
Erase contents of drive A:? y
Caution: All data on this disk is about to be destroyed.
Continue? y
* dir a:<cr>
Directory of A:
Volume Label: "ALTUS_K2
", Volume S/N: DB1E-85A5
0 bytes in 0 file(s) (5080 kb free)

This command can be password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 67

4. The Parameter Editor

This section defines the Altus instrument Parameter Editor and the header structure that contains
operating and non-operating parameters and variables. The K2 header is 2040 bytes and the Mt.
Whitney header is 2736 bytes. The header of an .EVT file is a copy of the instrument header at
the time the event is opened. Although some variables, such as the maximum and minimum
values, are entered as the event file is closed. The K2 header has parameters for 12 channels and
the Mt. Whitney has channel parameters for 18.
Some are "operating parameters", required for the instrument to operate and others are for
documentation or reference. The parameters can be set to their default values using the
'DEFAULT' command in the Parameter Editor when the instrument is in Monitor mode. When an
internal FBA deck is installed, some of the sensor parameters are loaded from information in the
FBA's eeproms. Each user settable parameter has its own command in the Parameter Editor to
explain, view or set it. The parameters can also be viewed or set using the 'Edit Parameters' panel
in QuickTalk(r) for Windows.
As of firmware version 2.42 or later, parameters take effect immediately upon exiting the
Parameter Editor. Many, like serial number, take place immediately with no other effect on the
recorder. Others, such as changing selected channels or sampling rate, will require stopping and
restarting acquisition - which will be done automatically.
In the Application firmware 2.00 or later The 'DEFAULT' command operates differently. The
following will load or default all parameters except those related to a sensor:
Automatically loaded parameter file (AUTOLOAD.PAR)
Manually loaded parameter files (EDIT, LOAD filename.PAR command)
Parameters transmitted from QuickTalk(r) Parameter Window in block mode
Normal default of parameters (EDIT, DEFAULT command)
In the Application firmware 2.00 or later the sensor parameters can only be overwritten by:
Manually changing the parameters (EDIT, CHANNEL XX commands, listed below)
A new factory default parameter command (EDIT, DEFAULT FACTORY command,
FACTORY cannot be abbreviated to 3 letters.); if a new internal sensor is installed, this
command will default all parameters and load the sensor parameters stored in the FBA into
the recorder.
Affected Sensor Parameters and their corresponding EDIT mode commands:
Damping, Full Scale, Natural Frequency, Sensitivity: CHANNEL CALIBRATION
Gain: CHANNEL GAIN
Type, Serial Number: CHANNEL SENSOR

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 69

To use the Monitor mode Parameter Editor, enter communications program's Terminal Window
and type "EDIT" at the main '*' prompt. The Editor prompt is 'EDIT>'. Type "HELP" to display
the editor commands. Type "ABORT" to exit the Editor without saving the changes and "QUIT"
or just "Q" to save any changes to Flash EPROM and return to the main '*' prompt. Separate
command and arguments with a space ' ' or equal sign ' ='. Separate arguments with a space or a
comma. Unless specified the parameters are available in both the K2 and Mt. Whitney
instruments. K2 channels range from 1 to 12 and Mt. Whitney channels are from 1 to 18.
Default values are in [ ].
In BLOCK mode the binary parameter structure is read from the instrument to a PC program that
allows editing of the structure. When editing is done the new binary parameter structure in sent
back to the instrument.
BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_GETPARMS
PKC_SETPARMS

Response Packet
PKR_PARMS
PKR_ACK

Saving and Loading Parameters

To save the current parameters to a PC in the binary file format .PAR:
1. At the EDIT prompt, 'EDIT>', use the "SAVE fn" command to save the parameters to a
.PAR file on the internal PCMCIA hard drive or SanDisk.
2. At the main prompt, '*', use the "TX fn" command to transfer the .PAR file from the
internal storage medium to the PC.
Or use QuickTalk(r) to 'Receive from Recorder'; the parameters
into its editor and then use 'Write to Disk...' the .PAR file.
To reload saved parameters to the instrument in the binary file format .PAR:
1. At the main prompt, '*', use the "RX fn" command to send the .PAR file from the PC to
the instruments internal PCMCIA hard drive or SanDisk.
2. At the EDIT prompt, 'EDIT>', use the "LOAD fn" command to load the .PAR file into
the Parameter Editor.
3. Use the "QUIT" or "Q" command to quit the Editor and save the new parameters to
EEPROM.
OR use QuickTalk(r) to 'Read from Disk...' the .PAR file into its editor and then use
'Transmit to Recorder' to send the parameters to the instrument.
NOTE 1: On startup, if a file by the name of AUTOLOAD.PAR exists in the A: or B: root
directories, then the recorder will load those parameters for use.

Page 70

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

NOTE 2: Not all parameters are loaded by a parameter file. Those parameters which are likely to
be private to an individual recorder are deliberately not loaded so that parameter files may be
shared by similar recorders (e.g. K2s). For example, the recorder serial number and sensor
parameters are not loaded by a parameter file.
Use the KWPARD support program to convert the binary .PAR file to an ASCII format .FPR file
for viewing.

Default Commands
DEFAULT
Set all user settable parameters, except CHANNEL CALIBRATION, CHANNEL GAIN and
CHANNEL SENSOR, to their default values.

DEFAULT FACTORY
Set All user settable parameters, including reading values from FBA eeproms.

Operating Parameters - General - User Settable

Notes: [default setting] refer to detailed description.

ABORT
Return to main prompt, '*', do NOT save changes.

BITMAP c1 c2 .. cn
Select channels to record. [K2= 4/6, MW= 18, Mt. Makalu=3/6] NCHANNELS will be set to
total number of channels selected.

BUF256 x
Used to force use of a fixed 256 byte packet size for block mode file transfers. Defaults to
Dynamic 2048 for higher throughput.

CELLULAR DURATION mmm

Cellular Phone Power Control, minimum length of Call-in windows. -1,0,1-127 minutes, -1 =
Power always ON for either Call-in or Call-out. 0 = Ignore all Call-in windows, Call-out ONLY
(if Autocall selected). 1-127 minutes = minimum length of Call-in Windows. [0] (Application
firmware 2.00).
This parameter can also be used in conjunction with the CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL
function to provide for timed recording. See CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL.

CELLULAR ON n hh mm
Call in Window[1..5] Start times at hour minute from midnight 00 00 to 23 59, or enter "OFF" to
disable window n. [OFF] (Application firmware 2.00).
This parameter can also be used in conjunction with the CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL
function to provide for timed recording. See CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 71

CELLULAR POWER_CONTROL mmm

Cellular Phone Power Control, enable or disable. 0 to disable, 1 to enable. [0]

CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL tr im
Cellular Trigger Control, enable or disable. tr=0 to disable, 1 to enable [0]. im=0 to trigger for
entire duration, 1 to cause impulse trigger [0].

CELLULAR WARMUP sss

Call-out only. Phone warmup time prior to attempt to dial out. 0-255 seconds. [0](Application
firmware 2.00).
This parameter can also be used in conjunction with the CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL
function to provide for timed recording. See CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL.

HELP
Display the top level parameter commands.

IRIG_TYPE
Select IRIG_E or IRIG-H. [IRIG-E].

NCHANNELS n
Number of channels to record, starting with channel 1. Overrides/changes the BITMAP setting.
[K2= 4/6, MW= 18, Mt. Makalu=3/6].

SDSTREAMS BITMAP c1 c2 ..c6

Bitmap of Channels to transmit (1 to 6 channels), must be a subset of the channels selected to
record. Bit0 = Ch1, etc.

SDSTREAMS BUFFER_SIZE n
Number of 16Kbyte units of Instrument mass storage used for a transmission buffer. A value of
64 == 1Mbytes. Limited by instrument mass storage capacity. A value of zero indicates no buffer
used.

SDSTREAMS FORMAT n
0 = uncompressed 24-bit data, 1 = Difference compression, default.

SDSTREAMS SAMPLE_RATE n
Samples per second, Instrument sample rate must be set to the same value as the SDS sample
rate. Pre-v2.90 firmware supports streaming data at only 100sps. v2.90 and later supports
sampling rates of 20, 40, 50, 100, 200, and 250sps. Set to 0 to turn OFF SDS. Default of 0, OFF.

SDSTREAMS TIMEOUT n
This parameter controls the MODE of the Serial Data Stream. 0 = Mode 1, 6..32767 = Mode 2,
and -1 = Mode 3.

STREAM APW s
Array propagation window, minimum trigger hold time. (1-65000 seconds) [0].

Page 72

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

STREAM FILTER n
Stream filter type selection. 0 = non-causal filter, 1 = causal filter. [0]

STREAM FT
Toggle Auto Functional Test after event. [Off].

STREAM MINRUNTIME s
Minimum run time. (1-65000 seconds) [0].

STREAM PREEVENT s
Pre-event memory size. (1-45 seconds) [3 seconds].

STREAM POSTEVENT s
Post-event run time. (1-65000 seconds) [10 seconds].

STREAM SPS n
Sample rate. (20, 40, 50, 100, 200 or 250 sps) [200].

STREAM STORAGE pd sd
Set storage devises. pd = primary (A-B), sd = secondary(A-B) [A,A].

STREAM THRESHOLD tn dn
Total Voting threshold. TOTAL VOTES TO TRIGGER/DETRIGGER. tn= total trigger votes (110000) [1] dn= total detrigger votes (1-10000) [1].

STREAM VOTERS x v [x v]
Source for trigger/detrigger votes. x= source: channel (c1..c12/c18), External Signal(e),
Keyboard(k), Network(n) n= number of votes for source (+/-100 votes) [1 vote for all sources].

Operating Parameters - Channel Specific - User Settable - Each

channel's parameters are set separately. ch = channel#
CHANNEL ALARM ch n.nn (n.nn n.nn)
Alarm trigger threshold(s). (0.01% - 100.0% Full Scale) [2.00%].

CHANNEL CALIBRATION ch fs s nf d
Calibration parameters. +/- fullscale Volts [2.5V], sensitivity Volts/unit [2G FBA= 1.250],
natural frequency Hz (0.0000 - 250.000)[0.0], damping (0.00 - 1.00)[0.0] or defaulted from
internal FBA. (Application firmware 2.00 not changed by normal DEFAULT).
NOTE: The Makalu system defaults to a +/- full scale of 20.0V, and to a sensitivity of 10.0V/G to
support a 2G sensor.

CHANNEL FILTER ch n
Trigger filter selection. You have a choice between three different trigger filters for each channel.
(0 = IIR-A, 1 = Classic strong motion, 2 = IIR-C) [1]

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 73

CHANNEL FIXED_TYPES x
Channel fixed sensor types. By default this is disabled and the system automatically determines
sensor types by sending a pulse to the calibration input of the sensor to determine the difference
between an FBA and an EpiSensor. This command allows you to disable the automatic sensor
determination. (0 = Fixed types disabled (auto-determined), 1 = Fixed types enabled (set
manually))
NOTE: This command applies to all channels.

CHANNEL GAIN ch g
Gain. (1-1000) [1] (Application firmware 2.00 not changed by normal DEFAULT).

CHANNEL ID ch cs
Alphanumeric ID string. (4 characters) [" "].

CHANNEL LOCATION ch n e u al az
External sensor's location relative to instrument. n= meters north (32000)[0], e= meters east
(32000)[0], u= meters up (32000)[0], altitude= zenith +90, horizontal 0, nadir -90[0], azimuth= 0359, clockwise from north [0].

CHANNEL LTA ch n
Length of Long Term Average time in seconds. Values available are: 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100,
120. [60]

CHANNEL MAP g ch1 ch2 ch3

Command to map channel recording, usually to convert an XYZ sensor triax to LVT orientation
or vice versa. The group g is a sensor triax, with group 1 being channels 1, 2, 3 and group 2 being
channels 4, 5, 6. Channel mappings must be within that triax and must specify all available
channels. Negative mappings are used to indicate inverted data polarity.

CHANNEL RATIOS ch tr dt
Trigger and detrigger ratios for STA/LTA triggering method. Values available for trigger ratio
are: 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 20, 30, 40, 60, 100 [4]. Values available for detrigger ratio are: 10, 15,
20, 40, 60, 100 [40].

Page 74

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

CHANNEL SENSOR ch ty sn (cc rc sg)

Sensor type and serial number. sn= (1-65535) (Application firmware 2.00 not changed by normal
DEFAULT).
This command has three required commands (channel number, sensor type, and sensor serial
number) plus three optional parameters (cal coil sensitivity, range code, and sensor output gain)
which are used only for EpiSensor sensor types.
Sensor:
Code:

FBA-11
10

FBA-4g
11

FBA-2g
12

FBA-1g
13

FBA-0.5g
14

Sensor:
Code:

FBA-0.1g
16

FBA-23
20

WR1
30

EpiSensor S6000
32
33

Mark L22
34

Sensor:
Code:

Mark L4C
35

CMG3
36

CMG3T
37

CMG40T
38

KS-2000
40

Sensor:
Code:

GT-S13
41

CMG3ESP
42

KMI-SH1
43

KMI-SV1
44

CMG5
39

FBA-0.25g
15

EpiSensor Specific Parameters:

The Cal Coil value is the sensitivity of the EpiSensor Cal Coil in g/V.
The Range Code is a number that corresponds to the range jumper setting in an EpiSensor. It
has the values 1 to 5 where 1 is a full scale range of 4g, and 5 is a full scale range of 0.25g.
The Sensor Gain is a number that corresponds to the gain jumper setting in an EpiSensor.
The possible values are 1, 2, 4 and 8. The values 1 and 4 are used for a single ended
EpiSensor. The values 2 and 8 are used for a differential EpiSensor.
These values can be found on the EpiSensor data sheet. These values are read by the
instrument for an internal deck when the DEFAULT FACTORY command is issued.

CHANNEL STA ch n
Length of Short Term Average time in seconds. Values available are: 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0,
1.2, 1.4, 1.6, 1.8, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 5.0, 10.0. [1.0]

CHANNEL THRESHOLD ch tt td
Event trigger and detrigger thresholds, % of FullScale. (0.01% - 100.0%) [2.0%].

CHANNEL TRIGGER_TYPE ch n
Selects trigger type for each channel. (0 = Threshold trigger, 1 = STA/LTA) [0]

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 75

Sensor Type and Sensitivity Determination

To determine the sensor type, the instrument applies -1.25 Volts to the CAL line while turning on
the UNDAMP signal. If an FBA is present, this causes no significant change to the sensor output.
If an EpiSensor is present this voltage is translated into an acceleration which can be measured by
the instrument. The sensor output voltage is sampled for one scan before and after applying the
voltage to the CAL line. If the difference is greater than 29.3 mVolts, the sensor is tested for
EpiSensor, otherwise it is presumed to be an FBA.
Once the determination has been made that the sensor is an EpiSensor, the difference is compared
to 2.18 Volts. If the difference is less than 2.18 volts, the channel is tested by first computing the
acceleration caused be the CAL line by using the equation:
aCalDac = vCalDac * calcoil

where vCalDac is the actual voltage applied to the CAL line and calcoil is the calcoil parameter
read from the EpiSensor EEPROM.
The calcoil value is tested for .03 > calcoil > .07 before use and forced to a nominal value of .05
if it is outside of this range. The sensitivity is computed by dividing the computed difference by
aCalDac.
The resulting sensitivity is then divided by the channel gain value to compensate for an external
gain board. This final result is divided by .625 Volts (the expected result for a sensor set to
minimum sensitivity) to produce a scalar with an expected value of between 1 and 8, inclusive.
The sensed sensor sensitivity in V/g that is computed from the scalar is reported by the header
dump of an EVT file. In addition, if the stored channel sensitivity is detected to be 0, the
computed sensitivity will be stored as the channel sensitivity.
The computed scalar is also stored as a group type for each triax of sensors to be used for scaling
the FT and SRT signals applied to the CAL line for these events.
It should be noted that if EpiSensors of different sensitivities are included on a particular triax of
channels, the scalar for the most sensitive channel will be used for FT and SRT events.
The signals applied to triaxes of channels with EpiSensors for FT and SRT events are scaled so
that records generated by EpiSensors of different sensitivities will look the same. This is done for
ease of viewing these events and to prevent possible signal clipping when very sensitive
EpiSensors are used.
NOTE 1: Automatic sensor determination is done each time that acquisition is started, and
affects the operation of the FT and SRT commands, the application of the AQ DVM step
voltage, and the reported sensor type. It does not otherwise affect the recorded signals.
NOTE 2: Sensor determination can be disabled using the Edit mode's CHANNEL
FIXED_TYPE command. This command applies to all channels and allows you to set the
sensor types manually and not have those settings modified by the unit during acquisition
start. The current setting of CHANNEL FIXED_TYPES is reflected in the DISPLAY
SENSOR, DISPLAY WRITE and CHANNEL SENSOR output.

Page 76

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Operating Parameters - Digital Field Station Port

The Digital Field Station is a supplemental path for receiving data from the recorder in real time.
The RS-232 three wire external connection is available as follows:
K2: J4, Aux I/O
Pin A: DSPRXD (RS-232 input, not used)
Pin L: DSPTXD (RS-232 output)
Pins N, P, R, T, U: GND
Etna Basic: Interconnect option I/O (109875-01)
Pin A: DSPRXD (RS-232 input, not used)
Pin V: DSPTXD (RS-232 output)
Pins E, X, g: GND
Mt. Whitney: J4, Aux I/O
Pin A: DSPRXD (RS-232 input, not used)
Pin L: DSPTXD (RS-232 output)
Pins N, P, R, T, U: GND
There are two protocols provided: CRLF and KMI.
CRLF transmits 1, 2, or 3 channels at 100sps. The data format consists of a string of 16 bit data,
one for each selected channel, delimited by a Carriage Return and a Line Feed.
<LF><ch1-high><ch1-low><ch2-high><ch2-low><ch3-high><ch3-low><CR>
When the recorder sample rate is 200, the DFS data stream is decimated to 100sps before output.
At 200sps, the DFS DECIMATION parameter has no effect.
When the recorder sample rate is 100, the DFS data stream will be output as 100sps or 50sps,
depending on the setting of the DFS DECIMATION parameter.
The DFS cannot be selected when recording at 20, 40, 50, or 250sps.
Note that the data is truncated to the high two bytes of the 24 bit data words. Also the 4800 baud
rate will only support one channel. The CRLF protocol is limited to any three channels from one
set of six channels. This means:
any 3 channels from channels 1 through 6
- OR any 3 channels from channels 7 through 12
- OR any 3 channels from channels 13 through 18
The KMI protocol is a project specific packet format. It is not for general use.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 77

DFS BAUDRATE cd
Digital Field Station Port, Off/On-BaudRate. [Off= 0]
Code
BaudRate

0
Off

1
4800

2
9600

3
19200

DFS DECIMATION cd
Selects 100sps or 50sps DFS output when the instrument sample rate is 100. When the instrument
sample rate is 200, this parameter has no effect. This command only affects the DFS CRLF
protocol only.
0 = 1:1, no decimation [default]
1 = 1:2, filter & decimation by 2

DFS PROTOCOL cd
DFS Protocol. (CRLF, (MW- KMI20HZ)) [none].

DFS SET c1 c2 .. cn
Select channels to output on DFS port. (CRLF - any 1..3 channels) (MW only-KMI20Hz - any
1..18 channels) [0].

Operating Parameters -System Timing - Global Positioning

System, GPS
GPS mp mm cc
GPS power-on update interval (mp= 0-255 minutes) [30 minutes], maximum ON duration (mm=
0-255 minutes) [30 minutes], control type (0= Free field, 1=Master, 2=Slave) [Free Field].

UTCOFFSET n
Local time as the number of hours from UTC time. (+/-24.00 hours) [0.00].

Operating Parameters - Modem

To see the available modem commands, type at the EDIT> prompt:
EDIT> modCommands:
ACKNOWLEDGE
CALLOUT_MSG
EXTEND_PAUSE
MAXDIALS
PREFIX

ANSWER
CHECKIN_TIME
HANGUP
PAUSE
SUFFIX

AUTOCALL
COMPLETE_CALLOUT
INIT
PHONENUMBER
WAIT

MODEM ACKNOWLEDGMENT cs
String specifying a call acknowledgment string of up to six characters. During call out the
recorder must receive the string from the remote computer. If it does not, it will hang up (after
time-out) and attempt to establish a connection the number of times set in the EDIT mode
command MODEM MAXDIALS. [Default = unused].
If the MODEM ACKNOWLEDGMENT string is cleared with the command 'MODEM
ACKNOWLEDGMENT ""', no acknowledgment is required.

Page 78

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

MODEM ANSWER
Toggles the modem mode flag. ON = modem mode flag set, all call out condition flags clear.
[Default = OFF].

MODEM AUTOCALL
Dialog to toggle modem mode flag and call out condition flags. ON= initiate a telephone call on
conditions: Low Battery, Battery not charging, Extreme temperature, an Event occurred, GPS
Lock Failure, Alarm thresholds exceeded. [Default = OFF].
For call out on alarm to function properly the TERMINAL mode command ALARM
DURATION must be set to 0 (latch) or to 3 or more seconds.

MODEM CALLOUT_MSG cs
Message tag for AUTOCALL calls. (0-45 characters). [none].

MODEM CHECKIN_TIME hh mm dd
Time value specifying time at which to generate a daily call out to check in with the central
station, providing for a positive indication from the recorder that the recorder and modem are able
to communicate. [Default = OFF (hh = -1)].
Requires MODEM AUTOCALL to be set.
If the MODEM CHECKIN_TIME is cleared with the command "MODEM CHECKIN_TIME 1", no timed callout will occur.

MODEM COMPLETE_CALL x (0=off, 1=on). [0].

When MODEM COMPLETE_CALL is enabled and AUTOCALL is correctly set up and
triggered, the system will call out until all call attempts are completed OR any call out is
terminated with the ANSWERMODE or CALLMODE command.
Requires MODEM AUTOCALL to be set.
If the MODEM COMPLETE_CALL is cleared with the command "MODEM
COMPLETE_CALL 0", the call will be satisfied as soon as a successful connection is made.

MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE n
Maximum duration of pause between call attempts. (0-254 minutes). [0].

MODEM HANGUP cs
String to hangup the modem. (1-15 characters) [ATH0].

MODEM INIT cs
String to initialize the modem. (1-53 characters) [AT&FE0&C1S0=1&W].

MODEM MAXDIAL n
Number of times MODEM AUTOCALL will dial a phone number. (0-255) [10].

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 79

MODEM PAUSE s
Number of seconds between phone number dials. (0-255 seconds) [10 seconds].

MODEM PHONENUMBER i n
AUTOCALL phone numbers. i= index (1 primary , 2 secondary, .. 4 fourth) n= phone number
(1..23 numeric characters) [none, none, none, none].

MODEM PREFIX cs
Modem prefix string. (1..15 characters) [ATDT].

MODEM SUFFIX cs
Modem suffix string. (1..15 characters) [none].

MODEM WAIT s
Number of seconds to wait for carrier detect. (0-255 seconds) [45 seconds].

Non-Operating Parameters - User Settable

COMMENT cs
Alphanumeric string. (32 characters) ["Default Parameters"].

LOCATION la lo el
Instrument location. Latitude ( 90.0000 North[0.0]), Longitude ( 180.0000 East) [0.0], Elevation (
32000 meters above sea level)[0.0].

SERIALNUMBER n
Instrument serial number (100-65535) [Not changed, set at factory].

STNID cs
Station ID name. (1-4 alphanumeric characters) [" "].

SITEID cs
Site ID name. (1-16 alphanumeric characters) [" "] [Application firmware 2.00].

USERCODE n v
One to four user codes. n= number (1..4), v= value (-32768 ..+32767) [0,0,0,0].

Page 80

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Other Header Values controlled by the Instrument Firmware

-----------

System Block firmware version

BootLoader firmware version
Application firmware version
DSP firmware version
Restart source byte

-----

Battery Voltage
Temperature

-------------

Clock source - source of last time update

GPS status byte
GPS receiver State of Health byte
GPS Lock Fail count
GPS Update Clock count
GPS Last Drift - difference between
Clock & GPS @ last update
GPS Last Two Turn-on Times
GPS Last Two Update Times
GPS Last Two Lock Times
GPS Latitude - reported by receiver
GPS Longitude - reported by receiver
GPS Altitude - reported by receiver

-------------

Other header variables that have meaning only within the

context of an event header
---------------------------------

Header Version Number

Acquisition Delay - group delay of FIR filters
Trigger Bit Map, channel or channels that triggered recording
Ch 1..12(18) maximum peak value
Ch 1..12(18) maximum peak offset from start of file
Ch 1..12(18) minimum peak value
Ch 1..12(18) minimum peak offset from start of file
Ch 1..12(18) mean
Ch 1..12(18) acquisition offset
Start time, first scan time, seconds from 1980
Start time milliseconds
Trigger time, seconds from 1980
Trigger time milliseconds
Event duration
Number of scans in event
StreamReadOnly flag byte - FT flag

QuickLook(r) for Windows, QLCA for DOS, KW2ASC and KWPHF have commands to write
the event header to an formatted ASCII text file.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 81

STA/LTA Triggering
Simplistically STA/LTA triggering works by comparing a short term running average of the
trigger filtered data with a long term average of the trigger filtered data. If the short term average
exceeds the long term average by the trigger ratio the channel is considered "triggered". When the
channel is triggered the LTA length increases to the maximum length of 120 seconds to prevent
loss of "coda" in a long event. Also the criteria to detrigger the channel is that the STA/LTA ratio
must fall below the actual ratio multiplied by the detrigger ratio. These techniques allow the user
to set the instrument relatively easily as only one type of STA/LTA needs to be considered.
To select the STA/LTA trigger for each channel select the trigger type to 1 using the CHANNEL
TRIGGER command. Now select the length of the short term average in seconds using the
CHANNEL STA command (these range from 0.1 to 10 seconds). Next select the long term
average time in seconds using the CHANNEL LTA command (these range from 20 to 120
seconds). Finally, select the ratio of the STA/LTA that will cause the channel to trigger and
detrigger using the CHANNEL RATIOS command (these range from 1.5 to 100 for triggering
and 10 to 100 for detriggering). The lower you set the trigger ratio the more sensitive the unit and
the more events both real and spurious you are likely to record. The detrigger ratio will determine
how sensitive the channel becomes once it has triggered. You then need to repeat this procedure
for each channel that is active in the recorder's triggering scheme.
Remember that this setup causes a channel to trigger, but in the STREAMS setup you will still
need to set up how many channels of triggering are required to trigger the unit for recording.
The STA/LTA algorithm is not supported in the Etna.

Page 82

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Parameter Commands - Detailed Descriptions

All of the following parameter entry commands take place at the Monitor mode Parameter Editor
prompt EDIT>. To receive help for a parameter editor command, type the command without any
arguments. In the following the parameter is also shown with its header structure name and the
type. Variables longer than one byte are in MOTOROLA convention, high byte first. The header
byte offsets are valid or K2 header version 1.30 and Mt. Whitney version 1.20. The type
definitions are:
char, unsigned char
short, unsigned short, int, unsigned int
long, unsigned long
float

1 byte integer
2 byte integer, <high><low>
4 byte integer, <high><high-mid><low-mid><low>
4 byte floating point (IEEE format)

ABORT
Return to main prompt, '*', do NOT save changes.

BITMAP c1 c2 .. cn
The BITMAP command enters the selected channels to be recorded by the instrument. Any
channel may be selected (cn). Available in Mt. Whitney application firmware and K2 application
firmware version 1.08 or later. Prior versions of the K2 used only NCHANNELS to select the
number of channels to record starting with channel #1. When this parameter command is used the
parameter NCHANNELS is set to the count of the channels selected. To select all possible
channels use '*' instead of a channel number. To record channels 2,4 and 6, type at the EDIT>:
bit 2 4 6<cr>

To examine the channels selected for recording, type at the EDIT>:

bit<cr>

Response:
Syntax: BITMAP 1 3 4 6 or BIT *
18 Channel(s) Selected: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

The K2 has channels 1..4, 1..6 or 1..12. The Mt. Whitney has channels 1..18. The Makalu has
channels 1..3 or 1..6.
The parameter is an unsigned long, misc_rw_parms.channel_bitmap. Bit 0 = channel 1, etc.
K2 offset: 290h MW offset: 368h
Reference: unsigned long stream_rw_parms.triggerbitmap
K2 offset: 244h MW offset: 31Ch

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 83

BUF256 x
In the Etna, Makalu, and New MCU K2 and Mt. Whitney, packet sizes can vary depending on
available free memory and success of file transfers. Bad connections will drop back to smaller
packets ensuring successful transmission while good connections will use larger packet transfers
increasing speed - particularly over IP links (including cell phones).
This command is used to select dynamic modes or force use of a fixed size 256 byte packet for
block mode file transfers. By using this command the user may force use of a 256 byte buffer mainly when using older interface software that will not support the larger or variable packet
sizes normally used during block mode file transfers. Default for this parameter is set to Dynamic
2048 mode for improved throughput.
Dynamic 4096 mode is only supported in v3.02 firmware or later, and only on Etna, Makalu, or
New MCU K2s.
In all cases, dynamic packet sizes may be limited by available free memory.
The parameter is reflected by the DIS RWM command.
To force use of a 256 byte buffer, type at the EDIT>:
buf256 1<cr>

Response:
File Buffer Size: 256 (1)

To allow use of a dynamic buffer up to 2048 bytes, type at the EDIT>:

buf256 0<cr>

Response:
File Buffer Size: Dynamic 2048 (0)

To allow use of a dynamic buffer up to 4096 bytes, type at the EDIT>:

buf256 2<cr>

Response:
File Buffer Size: Dynamic 4096 (2)

Page 84

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

To examine the current setting, type at the EDIT>:

buf256<cr>

Response:
Syntax: File Buffer Size [1=256, 2=Dynamic 4096, else=Dynamic 2048]
File Buffer Size: Dynamic 2048 (0)

The parameter is an unsigned char, misc_rw_parms.blockBuf256. 1=256, 2=Dynamic 4096,

else=Dynamic 2048.
K2 offset: 2A7h MW offset: 37Fh

CELLULAR DURATION mmm

The CELLULAR DURATION command controls the Cellular Phone Power Control line, CPPC.
-1 = CPPC line is always enabled. Cellular Phone always ON. 0 = CPPC line is OFF, no Call-in
windows. (Select Autocall mode, using the CALLMODE command, to allow Call-out messages).
Enter 1 to 127 minutes to specify the length of time in minutes for each Call-in Window (See the
CELLULAR ON command to enter the Call-in Window Start Times). Range is -1, 0, 1-127
minutes. Default = 0. Added 7/96. [Application firmware 2.00]
This parameter can also be used in conjunction with the CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL
function to provide for timed recording. See CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL.
To set the duration to 5 minutes, type at the EDIT>:
cel dur 5<cr>

To examine the current entry, type at the EDIT>:

cel dur<cr>

Response:
Cellular Duration = 5

This parameter is char, modem_rw_parms.cellOnTime.

K2 offset: 7B8h MW offset: A70h

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 85

CELLULAR ON n hh mm
The CEL ON command enters up to five window times (n) in a 24-hour period (00 00 - 23 59) for
the cellular phone to power up and be available for incoming calls. To disable a window time
enter "-1" in the hours for OFF, Default = OFF. Added 7/96. [Application firmware 2.00] To
enter five times spread over 24 hours, type at the EDIT>:
cel
cel
cel
cel
cel

on
on
on
on
on

1
2
3
4
5

01:00<cr>
06:00<cr>
11:00<cr>
16:00<cr>
21:00<cr>

This parameter can also be used in conjunction with the CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL
function to provide for timed recording. See CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL.
To examine the CELLULAR ON times, type at the EDIT>:
cel on<cr>

Response:
Syntax:
cell on
cell on
cell on
cell on
cell on

CELLULAR ON x = hh mm (x = 1-5, h = 0-23 (-1= OFF), mm = 0-59)

1 = 01:00
2 = 06:00
3 = 11:00
4 = 16:00
5 = 21:00

To enter one window time at noon and disable the others, type at the EDIT>:
cel
cel
cel
cel
cel

on
on
on
on
on

1
2
3
4
5

12 00<cr>
-1<cr>
-1<cr>
-1<cr>
-1<cr>

Response:
cell
cell
cell
cell
cell

on
on
on
on
on

1
2
3
4
5

=
=
=
=
=

12:00
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

The parameter is int, modem_rw_parms.cellStartTime[5]

On Time
1
2
3
4
5

Page 86

K2 offset
7BAh
7BCh
7BEh
7C0h
7C2h

Document 302219 Rev P

MW offset
A72h
A74h
A76h
A78h
A7Ah

March, 2006

CELLULAR POWER_CONTROL mmm

The CELLULAR POWER_CONTROL command enables or disables the Cellular Phone Power
Control output. One K2 output on the auxiliary connector is shared as either a 1pps output, or as a
Cellular Power Control line, CPPC. When this command is disabled, this output serves as a 1pps
output - which is the default. When enabled, the output will act as a selection of cellular phone
power. 0 will disable CPPC, 1 will enable CPPC.
This command only applies to the K2 or Makalu.
To enable CPPC, type at the EDIT>:
cel pow 1<cr>

Response:
Cellular MODEM power control enabled.

To examine the current entry, type at the EDIT>:

cel pow<cr>

Response:
Syntax: CELLULAR POWER_CONTROL = mmm (0 disabled, 1 enabled) Cellular MODEM
power control enabled.

The parameter is char, modem_rw_parms.cellShare, bit 0.

K2 offset: 7B7h MW offset: A6Fh

CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL tr im
The CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL command controls the cellular power trigger feature.
This command is used in combination with the CELLULAR ON command to define time
windows during which recording should be triggered. When CELLULAR
TRIGGER_CONTROL is enabled, recording will be triggered at the specified CELLULAR ON
times.
NOTE: The CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL is provided to allow creation of timed
recordings, but is incompatible with the use of the CELLULAR ON command to control cellular
phone power on windows. When used for timed recording, the CELLULAR commands can not
be used to also control cellular power and call-in windows.
To use the CELLULAR commands for control of cellular call-in windows, set the "tr" argument
of the CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL to zero (default). When the "tr" argument is set to
zero, the value of the "im" argument is unimportant, but necessary.
To use the CELLULAR commands for control of timed recordings, set the time windows using
the CELLULAR ON commands, then enable the CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL by setting
the "tr" argument to one. The CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL mode of operation will be
controlled by the "im" impulse value argument.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 87

When CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL is enabled, setting the "im" argument to zero will
cause recording to be triggered for the entire cellular power on time, namely the total of the
CELLULAR DURATION and CELLULAR WARMUP times.
When CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL is enabled, setting the "im" argument to one will
cause an impulse trigger of width 0.1 seconds to be generated, causing the length of the recording
to be controlled by the STREAM PREEVENT and STREAM POSTEVENT settings.
This feature works by providing an automatic internal keyboard trigger. If the keyboard trigger
votes parameter is not set appropriately, recording will not trigger.
When the CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL command is entered without arguments, the
response will be:
EDIT> CEL TRI<cr>
CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL = trigger, impulse (0 disabled, 1 enabled)
Internal cellular trigger control disabled, duration.
EDIT>

It should be noted that when the "im" impulse value is zero and serial communication with the
instrument is occurring, the trigger will remain present for 5 minutes after communication ceases.
To set the system to record automatically for one hour at 2:00am and 3:30pm (15:30), type at the
EDIT>:
EDIT>
EDIT>
EDIT>
EDIT>
EDIT>
EDIT>
EDIT>
EDIT>

cel
cel
cel
cel
cel
cel
cel
cel

war 0
dur 60
on 1 2 0
on 2 3 30
on 3 -1
on 4 -1
on 5 -1
tri 1 0

NOTE: When using the CELLULAR TRIGGER command to enable timed recordings, it is
important to assure that the windows are set far enough ahead to avoid conflicting with the
current window activity, and that no RS-232 activity will extend the windows unexpectedly.
Kinemetrics recommends that the nearest window time be set at least 10 minutes ahead of the
current time and that any computer connections which may cause RS-232 activity (such as
QuickTalk(r)) be disconnected.
The parameter is char, modem_rw_parms.cellShare, bit 2&1.
K2 offset: 7B7h MW offset: A6Fh

Page 88

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

CELLULAR WARMUP sss

The CELLULAR WARMUP command enters the number of seconds(sss) the cellular phone is
allowed to warmup after power is applied and before it attempts to dial out, Call-out. The power
is held ON for two seconds after termination of a call. Not used for Call-in Windows. Range is 0
to 255 seconds. Default = 0. Added 7/96. [Application firmware 2.00]
This parameter can also be used in conjunction with the CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL
function to provide for timed recording. See CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL.
To enter 10 seconds for warmup, type at the EDIT>:
cel war 10<cr>

To examine the warmup time, type at the EDIT>:

cel war<cr>

Response:
Cellular Warmup = 10

This parameter is char, modem_rw_parms.cellWarmupTime

K2 offset: 7B9h MW offset: A71h

CHANNEL ALARM ch n.nn (n.nn n.nn)

The CHANNEL ALARM command enters the signal value, as a % of Full Scale, that is to be the
specified channel's alarm thresholds. ch = the channel number. n.nn = the %FS value.
In an Etna, multiple alarm levels are permitted. The number of required parameters for the
CHANNEL ALARM command will be determined by the setting of the 'ALARM ALARM n'
command, which specifies the number of alarms used.
To change the signal threshold of channel 5 to 30% of full scale on a recorder with one alarm
active, type at the EDIT>:
cha ala 5 30.0000<cr>

To change the signal threshold of channel 5 to 30% of full scale on the first alarm and 15% of full
scale on the second alarm on a recorder with two alarms active, type at the EDIT>:
cha ala 5 30.0000 15.0000<cr>

Note that if three (3) alarm levels are used, alarm values specified MUST be in ascending order of
value. For example: 2,4,5 and not 3,1,7.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 89

To examine the channel alarm settings, type at the EDIT>:

cha ala<cr>

Response:
Ch. 1 Alarm trigger at 2.0000% of full scale
:
Ch. 12 Alarm trigger at 2.0000% of full scale
Syntax: CHANNEL ALARM = ch#, trigger
(percent of full scale)

The parameter is a float, channel_rw_parms[#].alarmTriggerThreshold.

Channel:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

K2 offsets:
300h
34Ch
398h
3E4h
430h
47Ch
4C8h
514h
560h

MW offsets:
3D8h
424h
470h
4BCh
508h
554h
5A0h
5ECh
638h

Channel:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

K2 offsets:
5ACh
5F8h
644h
-------------

MW offsets:
684h
6D0h
71Ch
768h
7B4h
800h
84Ch
898h
8E4h

CHANNEL CALIBRATION ch fs s nf d
This parameter documents the calibration characteristics of the sensor attached to each channel's
input. When that sensor is an installed internal FBA deck, the instrument will get this
information directly from the sensor at power-up. Also see CHANNEL SENSOR to enter the
sensor serial number and type.
ARGUMENT
RANGE
ch = the channel number.
K2: 1..12, MW: 1..18
fs = +/- full scale in Volts.
0.0 - 25.0V [2.50]
s = sensitivity in Volts/unit.
-5000.0 - +5000.0V [1.25]
(FBA:1g = 2.50V, 2g = 1.25V,
4g = 0.625V)
nf = natural frequency.
0.000 - 250.000Hz [0.000]
(1g & 2g FBA = 50Hz, 4g FBA = 90Hz,
EpiSensor = 200Hz)
d = damping.
0.00 - 1.00 [0.00]

NOTE: The Makalu system defaults to a full scale of 20.0V, and to a sensitivity of 10.0V/G to
support a 2G sensor.
Note also that QuickLook(r) uses the +/- full scale value entered for the channel to correctly label
the channel traces.
To enter the information for channel 2 with an older 2g FBA, type at the EDIT>:
cha cal 2 2.5 1.25 50.25 0.42<cr>

Page 90

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

To examine the sensor calibration values, type at the EDIT>:

cha cal<cr>

Response:
CH= 1: FS=2.50 V, SEN=1.250
CH= 2: FS=2.50 V, SEN=1.250
:
CH=12: FS=2.50 V, SEN=1.250
Syntax: CHANNEL CALIBRATION

The parameters are:

V/unit, NAT FREQ=0.00 hz, DMP=0.0000

V/unit, NAT FREQ=50.25 hz, DMP= 0.4200
V/unit, NAT FREQ=0.00 hz, DMP=0.0000
= ch#, fullscale, sens, natFreq, damping

float channel_rw_parms[#].fullscale
float channel_rw_parms[#].sensitivity
float channel_rw_parms[#].damping
float channel_rw_parms[#].naturalFrequency

These values are stored in consecutive locations within each channel. Only the offset of
...fullscale is listed in the following table.
Channel:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

K2 offsets:
2E8h
334h
380h
3CCh
418h
464h
4B0h
4FCh
548h

MW offsets:
3C0h
40Ch
458h
4A4h
4F0h
53Ch
588h
5D4h
620h

Channel:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

K2 offsets:
594h
5E0h
62Ch
-------------

MW offsets:
66Ch
6B8h
704h
750h
79Ch
7E8h
834h
880h
8CCh

CHANNEL FILTER ch n
In the K2, Mt. Whitney, and Makalu you have a choice of three different trigger filters. These are
called IIR-A, Classic Strong Motion, IIR-C. The approximate bandpass of these filters at each
sampling rate is shown in the table below. You should select the filter appropriate for your
application.
The parameter n is defined as follows: (0 = IIR-A, 1 = Classic Strong Motion, 2 = IIR-C) [1]
TRIGGER TYPE
IIR-A
Classic Strong Motion
IIR-C

20sps
~0.12-2Hz
~0.01-1.25Hz
~0.2-4Hz

40sps
~0.24-4Hz
~0.02-2.5Hz
~0.4-8Hz

50sps
~0.3-5Hz
~0.025-3.125Hz
~0.5-10Hz

TRIGGER TYPE
IIR-A
Classic Strong Motion
IIR-C

100sps
~0.6-10Hz
~0.05-6.25Hz
~1-20Hz

200sps
~1.2-20Hz
~0.1-12.5Hz
~2-40Hz

250sps
~1.5-25Hz
~0.12-15Hz
~2.5-50Hz

To select the IIR-A filter for channel 2, type at the EDIT>:

cha fil 2 0<cr>

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 91

To examine the channel filter selections, type at the EDIT>:

cha fil<cr>

Response:
Ch. 1,
Ch. 2,
Ch. 3,
Ch. 4,
Ch. 5,
Ch. 6,
Ch. 7,
Ch. 8,
Ch. 9,
Ch. 10,
Ch. 11,
Ch. 12,
Syntax:

trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
CHANNEL

filter type B.
filter type A.
filter type B.
filter type B.
filter type B.
filter type B.
filter type B.
filter type B.
filter type B.
filter type B.
filter type B.
filter type B.
FILTER_TRIGGER_TYPE = ch, trigger type [0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C]

The parameters are:

unsigned char iirTrigFilter

These values are stored in locations within each channel.

Channel:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

K2 offsets:
2E1h
32Dh
379h
3C5h
411h
45Dh
4A9h
4F5h
541h

MW offsets:
3B9h
405h
451h
49Dh
4E9h
535h
581h
5CDh
619h

Channel:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

K2 offsets:
58Dh
5D9h
625h
-------------

MW offsets:
665h
6B1h
6FDh
749h
795h
7E1h
82Dh
879h
8C5h

CHANNEL FIXED_TYPES x
Channel fixed sensor types. By default this is disabled and the system automatically determines
sensor types by sending a pulse to the calibration input to determine the difference between an
FBA and an EpiSensor. This command allows you to disable the automatic sensor determination
for those situations when automatic determination is not desirable.
The parameter x is defined as follows: (0 = Fixed types disabled (auto-determined), 1 = Fixed
types enabled (set manually))
To enable fixed types, type at the EDIT>:
cha fix 1<cr>

Response:
Sensor types: Fixed (CHA FIX 1)

Page 92

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

To disable fixed types, type at the EDIT>:

cha fix 0<cr>

Response:
Sensor types: Auto-determined (CHA FIX 0)

To determine present setting of fixed types, type at the EDIT>:

cha fix<cr>

Response:
Syntax: CHANNEL FIXED_TYPES n (0=disable, 1=enable)
Sensor types: Auto-determined (CHA FIX 0)

For a discussion of the sensor type and EpiSensor sensitivity determination, see the section
titled Sensor Type and Sensitivity Determination.
NOTE: This command applies to all channels.

CHANNEL GAIN ch g
This parameter command enters the instrument gain. ch = channel number. g = gain (1 - 1000)
[1]. The Mt. Whitney and K2 gain is set equal one only. To enter a gain of 1 in channel 5, type:
cha gai 5 1<cr>

To display the gain settings, type at the EDIT>:

cha gai<cr>

Response:
Ch. 1 Gain = 1
:
Ch. 12 Gain = 1
Syntax: CHANNEL GAIN = ch#, gain

The parameter is an unsigned short, channel_rw_parms[#].gain

Channel:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

March, 2006

K2 offsets:
2DEh
32Ah
376h
3C2h
40Eh
45Ah
4A6h
4F2h
53Eh

MW offsets:
3B6h
402h
44Eh
49Ah
4E6h
532h
57Eh
5CAh
616h

Channel:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Document 302219 Rev P

K2 offsets:
58Ah
5D6h
622h
-------------

MW offsets:
662h
6AEh
6FAh
746h
792h
7DEh
82Ah
876h
8C2h

Page 93

CHANNEL ID ch cs
This parameter command enters one to four character string for a channel's ID. ch = channel
number. cs = character string [" "]. To enter channel 2 as "VERT", type at the EDIT>:
cha id 2 vert<cr>

To display the channel IDs, type at the EDIT>:

cha id<cr>

Response:
Syntax: CHANNEL ID = ch#, string (up to 4 characters)
Ch. 1 ID: ONE
Ch. 2 ID: VERT
Ch. 3 ID: THRE
Ch. 4 ID: FOUR
Ch. 5 ID:
:
Ch. 12 ID:

The parameter is char channel_rw_parms[#].id[5]. The fifth character in the array is for the
NULL character to terminate the string.
Channel:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

K2 offsets:
2C8h
314h
369h
3ACh
3F8h
444h
490h
4DCh
528h

MW offsets:
3A0h
3ECh
438h
484h
4D0h
51Ch
568h
5B4h
600h

Channel:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

K2 offsets:
574h
5C0h
60Ch
-------------

MW offsets:
64Ch
698h
6E4h
730h
77Ch
7C8h
814h
860h
8ACh

CHANNEL LOCATION ch n e u al az
This parameter command enters the location of an external sensor relative to the recording
instrument. These values are zero for an internal sensor.
ch = channel number.
n = meters north
e = meters east
u = meters up
al = degrees altitude
az = degrees azimuth

K2: 1..4, 1..6, 1..12 MW: 1..18

+/- 32000 meters [0]
+/- 32000 meters [0]
+/- 32000 meters [0]
+/- 90 degrees, +90 zenith , 0 horizontal, -90 nadir [0]
0-359 clockwise from north [0]

To enter the location of an external sensor on channel 4, that is north 5 meters, east 8 meters, 1
meter higher, level and aligned with north, type at the EDIT>:
cha loc 4 5 8 1 0 0<cr>

Page 94

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

To verify the location of an external sensor, type at the EDIT>:

cha loc<cr>

Response:
Ch. 1 North=0, East=0, Up=0, Alt=0, Azim=0 meters
:
Ch. 4 North=4, East=5, Up=8, Alt=0, Azim=0 meters
:
Ch. 18 North=0, East=0, Up=0, Alt=0, Azim=0 meters
Syntax: CHANNEL LOCATION = ch#, north, east, up, altitude, azimuth (in meters)

These parameters are:

short channel_rw_parms[#].north
short channel_rw_parms[#].east
short channel_rw_parms[#].up
short channel_rw_parms[#].altitude
short channel_rw_parms]#].azimuth

These values are stored in consecutive locations within each channel. Only the address of ...north
is listed in the following table.
Channel:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

K2 offsets:
2D0h
31Ch
364h
3B4h
400h
44Ch
498h
4E4h
530h

MW offsets:
3A8h
3F4h
440h
48Ch
4D8h
524h
570h
5BCh
608h

Channel:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

K2 offsets:
57Ch
5C8h
614h
-------------

MW offsets:
654h
6A0h
6ECh
738h
784h
7D0h
81Ch
868h
8B4h

CHANNEL LTA ch n
This parameter allows you to set the Long Term Average time in seconds for use with the
STA/LTA triggering method. You should select the time interval appropriate for your application.
See discussion of STA/LTA.
The parameter n is the Long Term Average time in seconds. You can select from the following
available values: 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100, 120 [60]
To set the LTA time to 80 for channel 2, type at the EDIT>:
cha lta 2 80<cr>

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 95

To examine the LTA settings, type at the EDIT>:

cha lta<cr>

Response:
Ch. 1,
Ch. 2,
Ch. 3,
Ch. 4,
Ch. 5,
Ch. 6,
Ch. 7,
Ch. 8,
Ch. 9,
Ch. 10,
Ch. 11,
Ch. 12,
Syntax:

LTA 60 seconds.
LTA 80 seconds.
LTA 60 seconds.
LTA 60 seconds.
LTA 60 seconds.
LTA 60 seconds.
LTA 60 seconds.
LTA 60 seconds.
LTA 60 seconds.
LTA 60 seconds.
LTA 60 seconds.
LTA 60 seconds.
CHANNEL LTA = ch, lta

The parameters are:

unsigned char ltaseconds

These values are stored in locations within each channel.

Channel:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

K2 offsets:
2E3h
32Fh
37Bh
3C7h
413h
45Fh
4ABh
4F7h
543h

MW offsets:
3BBh
407h
453h
49Fh
4EBh
537h
583h
5CFh
61Bh

Channel:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

K2 offsets:
58Fh
5DBh
627h
-------------

MW offsets:
667h
6B3h
6FFh
74Bh
797h
7E3h
82Fh
87Bh
8C7h

CHANNEL MAP g ch1 ch2 ch3

Command to map channel recording, usually to convert an XYZ sensor triax to LVT orientation
or vice versa. The group g is a sensor triax, with group 1 being channels 1, 2, 3 and group 2 being
channels 4, 5, 6. Channel mappings must be within the triax and must specify all available
channels. Negative mappings are used to indicate inverted data polarity.
Channel mapping is provided to allow users who prefer XYZ or LVT sensor orientations to use
that orientation regardless of the orientation of the sensors they have purchased. Channel mapping
will convert XYZ to LVT mapping, LVT to XYZ mapping, or can be used for any other
combination the user may choose.
It is important to note that channel mapping is intended to look as much as possible to the user as
if the physical connections to the sensor had been rewired. This allows the user to declare how he
wants to view the sensor and allow the Altus firmware to handle the data orientation. For this
reason and to avoid confusion, it is important to set the mapping FIRST. The only thing that
would be done before setting mapping would be to DEFAULT FACTORY if the sensor
parameters are to be read from an internal deck.

Page 96

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

After setting mapping, set up the channel information as if the sensor had been physically
rewired. For example, AQ offsets acquired by AQ DVM should be set after mapping, or else the
offsets will be applied to the wrong channels, just as they would be wrong if you had set the
offsets and then rewired the sensors.
NOTE: The default is 1:1 mapping, meaning that what is recorded is the exact physical
orientation of the sensors connected.
An alternate is to specify a mapping type. For example, the following two commands are
equivalent:
EDIT> CHA MAP 1 -3 -1 -2
- or EDIT> CHA MAP 1 XYZ

Both commands will cause an LVT oriented sensor triax to be remapped and recorded as XYZ.
Channel mapping information is stored in the header, and will be displayed by the QuickLook(r)
header display.
Channel information may be edited using the CHANNEL MAP command, or with the
CHANNEL MAPPING function available in the QuickTalk(r) (v2.12.1 or higher), which is
available from the Channel Parameters page of the Parameter Editor.
To set group 1 (channels 1, 2, 3) to map an LVT sensor to be recorded as XYZ:
EDIT> CHA MAP 1 XYZ
Physical Logical
Channel Channel
1
-3
2
-1
3
-2
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 97

To get help on mapping, type CHA MAP at the EDIT> prompt without any parameters:
EDIT> CHA MAP
Syntax: CHANNEL MAP = group, ch 1, ch 2, ch 3. Negative channel number to
invert polarity.
Group 1 = Channel 1, 2, and 3.
Group 2 = Channel 4, 5, and 6.
Group 3 = Channel 7, 8, and 9.
Group 4 = Channel 10, 11, and 12.
Alternate syntax: CHANNEL MAP = group, type[LVT, XYZ, or NONE].
LVT = translate XYZ to LVT.
XYZ = translate LVT to XYZ.
NONE = no translation.
Physical Logical
Channel Channel
1
-3
2
-1
3
-2
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12

For a discussion of the sensor type and EpiSensor sensitivity determination, see the section titled
Sensor Type and Sensitivity Determination.
This command can be password protected.

Figure 8 - LVT and XYZ Mapping

Page 98

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Figure 9 - Making an FBA look like an EpiSensor

Figure 10 - Making an EpiSensor look like an FBA

CHANNEL RATIOS ch tr dt
This parameter allows you to set the STA/LTA trigger and detrigger ratios for use with the
STA/LTA triggering method. You should select the ratios appropriate for your application. See
discussion of STA/LTA.
The parameter tr is the STA/LTA trigger ratio. You can select from the following available
values: 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 20, 30, 40, 60, 100. [4]
The parameter dt is the STA/LTA detrigger ratio, which is a percentage of the trigger ratio. You
can select from the following available values: 10, 15, 20, 40, 60, 100. [40]
To set the STA/LTA trigger ratio to 8 and the detrigger ratio to 60 for channel 2, type at the
EDIT>:
cha rat 2 8 60<cr>

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 99

To examine the STA/LTA ratios, type at the EDIT>:

cha rat<cr>

Response:
Ch. 1,
Ch. 2,
Ch. 3,
Ch. 4,
Ch. 5,
Ch. 6,
Ch. 7,
Ch. 8,
Ch. 9,
Ch. 10,
Ch. 11,
Ch. 12,
Syntax:

STA/LTA
STA/LTA
STA/LTA
STA/LTA
STA/LTA
STA/LTA
STA/LTA
STA/LTA
STA/LTA
STA/LTA
STA/LTA
STA/LTA
CHANNEL

trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
RATIO =

The parameters are:

ratio 4.0. detrigger ratio 40%.

ratio 8.0. detrigger ratio 60%.
ratio 4.0. detrigger ratio 40%.
ratio 4.0. detrigger ratio 40%.
ratio 4.0. detrigger ratio 40%.
ratio 4.0. detrigger ratio 40%.
ratio 4.0. detrigger ratio 40%.
ratio 4.0. detrigger ratio 40%.
ratio 4.0. detrigger ratio 40%.
ratio 4.0. detrigger ratio 40%.
ratio 4.0. detrigger ratio 40%.
ratio 4.0. detrigger ratio 40%.
ch, trigger ratio, detrigger ratio

unsigned short sta/ltaratio

unsigned char sta/ltapercent

These values are stored in consecutive locations within each channel.

Channel:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

K2 offsets:
2E4h
330h
37Ch
3C8h
414h
460h
4ACh
4F8h
544h

MW offsets:
3BCh
408h
454h
4A0h
4ECh
538h
584h
5D0h
61Ch

Channel:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

K2 offsets:
590h
5DCh
628h
-------------

MW offsets:
668h
6B4h
700h
74Ch
798h
7E4h
830h
87Ch
8C8h

CHANNEL SENSOR ch ty sn (cc rc sg)

This parameter command documents the type (ty) and serial number (sn) of a channel's sensor.
When an internal FBA deck is installed the instrument gets these values at power-up. The serial
number range is 0-65535 [0]. The sensor type is entered as a code [0]:
Code:
Sensor:

10
FBA-11

11
FBA-4g

12
FBA-2g

13
FBA-1g

14
FBA-0.5g

Code:
Sensor:

15
FBA-0.25g

16
FBA-0.1g

20
FBA-23

30
WR1

32
EpiSensor

Code:
Sensor:

33
S6000

34
Mark L22

35
Mark L4C

36
CMG3

37
CMG3T

Code:
Sensor:

38
CMG40T

39
CMG5

40
KS-2000

41
GT-S13

42
CMG3ESP

Code:
Sensor:

43
KMI-SH1

44
KMI-SV1

Page 100

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

To document an FBA23, S/N 423, on channel 9, type at the EDIT>:

cha sen 9 20 423<cr>

Three additional optional parameters (cal coil sensitivity, range code, and sensor output gain) are
used only for EpiSensor sensor types. These additional parameters will be set to zero unless the
sensor type is an EpiSensor.
EpiSensor Specific Parameters:
The Cal Coil value is the sensitivity of the EpiSensor Cal Coil in g/V.
The Range Code is a number that corresponds to the range jumper setting in an EpiSensor. It
has the values 1 to 5 where 1 is a full scale range of 4g, and 5 is a full scale range of 0.25g.
The Sensor Output Gain is a number that corresponds to the gain jumper setting in an
EpiSensor. The possible values are 1, 2, 4 and 8. The values 1 and 4 are used for a single
ended EpiSensor. The values 2 and 8 are used for a differential EpiSensor.
These values can be found on the EpiSensor data sheet. These values are read by the
instrument for an internal deck when the DEFAULT FACTORY command is issued.
To display the sensor documentation, type at the EDIT>:
cha sen<cr>

Response:
Ch. 1 Sensor type: 11, s/n: 425, cal coil: 0.000, range: 0, sensor gain: 0
:
Ch. 18 Sensor type: 0, s/n: 0, cal coil: 0.000, range: 0, sensor gain: 0
Sensor types: Auto-determined (CHA FIX 0)
Syntax: CHANNEL SENSOR = ch#, sensorType, sensorSerialNumber, calCoil, range,
sensorgain

For an EpiSensor, Cal Coil values must be in the range of 0.05 to 0.1. Range Codes must be in the
range of 1 to 5. Sensor Gain must be 1, 2, 4, or 8.
These parameters are: A unsigned short channel_rw_parms[#].sensorSerialNumberExt
(high word of S/N)
B unsigned short channel_rw_parms[#].sensorType
C unsigned short channel_rw_parms[#].sensorSerialNumber
(low word of S/N)
D float channel_rw_parms[#].calCoil
E unsigned char channel_rw_parms[#].range
F unsigned char channel_rw_parms[#].sensorgain
EpiSensor Range codes are defined as follows:
Range code
1
2
3
4

March, 2006

Full scale range

4G
2G
1G
1/2G

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 101

1/4G

Note that these values are not stored at consecutive locations within each channel.
Channel:
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F

K2 offsets:
2CEh
2DAh
2DCh
304h
308h
309h
31Ah
326h
328h
350h
354h
355h
366h
372h
374h
39Ch
3A0h
3A1h
3A2h
3BEh
3C0h
3E8h
3ECh
3EDh
3FEh
40Ah
40Ch
434h
438h
439h
44Ah
456h
458h
480h
484h
485h
496h
4A2h
4A4h
4CCh
4D0h
4D1h
4E2h
4EEh
4F0h
518h
51Ch
51Dh
52Eh
53Ah
53Ch
564h
568h
569h

MW offsets:
3A6h
3B2h
3B4h
3DCh
3E0h
3E1h
3F2h
3FEh
400h
428h
42Ch
42Dh
43Eh
44Ah
44Ch
474h
478h
479h
48Ah
496h
498h
4C0h
4C4h
4C5h
4D6h
4E2h
4E4h
50Ch
510h
511h
522h
52Eh
530h
558h
55Ch
55Dh
56Eh
57Ah
57Ch
5A4h
5A8h
5A9h
5BAh
5C6h
5C8h
5F0h
5F4h
5F5h
606h
612h
614h
63Ch
640h
641h

Channel:
10A
10B
10C
10D
10E
10F
11A
11B
11C
11D
11E
11F
12A
12B
12C
12D
12E
12F
13A
13B
13C
13D
13E
13F
14A
14B
14C
14D
14E
14F
15A
15B
15C
15D
15E
15F
16A
16B
16C
16D
16E
16F
17A
17B
17C
17D
17E
17F
18A
18B
18C
18D
18E
18F

K2 offsets:
57Ah
586h
588h
5B0h
5B4h
5B5h
5C6h
5D2h
5D4h
5FCh
600h
601h
612h
61Eh
620h
648h
64Ch
64Dh
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

MW offsets:
652h
65Eh
660h
688h
68Ch
68Dh
69Eh
6AAh
6ACh
6D4h
6D8h
6D9h
6EAh
6F6h
6F8h
720h
724h
725h
736h
742h
744h
76Ch
770h
771h
782h
78Eh
790h
7B8h
7BCh
7BDh
7CEh
7DAh
7DCh
804h
808h
809h
81Ah
826h
828h
850h
854h
855h
866h
872h
874h
89Ch
8A0h
8A1h
8B2h
8BEh
8C0h
8E8h
8ECh
8EDh

For a discussion of the sensor type and EpiSensor sensitivity determination, see the section titled
Sensor Type and Sensitivity Determination.

Page 102

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

CHANNEL STA ch n
This parameter allows you to set the Short Term Average time in seconds for use with the
STA/LTA triggering method. You should select the time interval appropriate for your application.
See discussion of STA/LTA.
The parameter n is the Short Term Average time in seconds. You can select from the following
available values: 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.4, 1.6, 1.8, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 5.0, 10.0 [1.0]
To set the STA time to 1.4 for channel 2, type at the EDIT>:
cha sta 2 1.4<cr>

To examine the STA settings, type at the EDIT>:

cha sta<cr>

Response:
Ch. 1,
Ch. 2,
Ch. 3,
Ch. 4,
Ch. 5,
Ch. 6,
Ch. 7,
Ch. 8,
Ch. 9,
Ch. 10,
Ch. 11,
Ch. 12,
Syntax:

STA 1.0
STA 1.4
STA 1.0
STA 1.0
STA 1.0
STA 1.0
STA 1.0
STA 1.0
STA 1.0
STA 1.0
STA 1.0
STA 1.0
CHANNEL

seconds.
seconds.
seconds.
seconds.
seconds.
seconds.
seconds.
seconds.
seconds.
seconds.
seconds.
seconds.
STA = ch, sta

The parameters are:

unsigned char stasecondsTten

These values are stored in locations within each channel.

Channel:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

March, 2006

K2 offsets:
2E2h
32Eh
37Ah
3C6h
412h
45Eh
4AAh
4F6h
542h

MW offsets:
3BAh
406h
452h
49Eh
4EAh
536h
582h
5CEh
61Ah

Channel:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Document 302219 Rev P

K2 offsets:
58Eh
5DAh
626h
-------------

MW offsets:
666h
6B2h
6FEh
74Ah
796h
7E2h
82Eh
87Ah
8C6h

Page 103

CHANNEL THRESHOLD ch tt dt
This parameter command enters the signal level, as a % of Full Scale, for each channel that is to
determine when that channel is considered triggered and when it is then to be detriggered [2.00].
ch = channel number. tt = trigger threshold. dt = detrigger threshold. The range is 0.01%FS to
100.0%FS.
To set the trigger threshold to 2.00% and the detrigger threshold to 1.50% for channel 3, type at
the EDIT>:
cha thr 3 2.0000 1.5000<cr>

To review the thresholds , type at the EDIT>:

cha thr<cr>

Response:
Ch 1 Trigger at 2.0000% Detrigger at 2.0000% of full scale
:
Ch 3 Trigger at 2.0000% Detrigger at 1.5000% of full scale
:
Ch 12 Trigger at 2.0000% Detrigger at 2.0000% of full scale
Syntax: CHANNEL THRESHOLD = ch#, trigger, detrigger (percent of full scale)

These parameters are:

float channel_rw_parms[#].triggerThreshold
float channel_rw_parms[#].detriggerThreshold

These values are consecutive within each channel. Only the address of the ...triggerThreshold is
given in the following table.
Channel:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Page 104

K2 offsets:
2F8h
344h
390h
3DCh
428h
474h
4C0h
50Ch
558h

MW offsets:
3D0h
41Ch
468h
4B4h
500h
54Ch
598h
5E4h
630h

Channel:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Document 302219 Rev P

K2 offsets:
5A4h
5F0h
63Ch
-------------

MW offsets:
67Ch
6C8h
714h
760h
7ACh
7F8h
844h
890h
8DCh

March, 2006

CHANNEL TRIGGER_TYPE ch n
This parameter allows you to select between two different trigger types. These are called
Threshold triggering or STA/LTA triggering. You should select the trigger type appropriate for
your application. See discussion of STA/LTA.
The STA/LTA algorithm is not supported in the Etna.
The parameter n is defined as follows: (0 = Threshold trigger, 1 = STA/LTA) [0]
To select the STA/LTA triggering method for channel 2, type at the EDIT>:
cha tri 2 1<cr>

To examine the channel trigger selections, type at the EDIT>:

cha tri<cr>

Response:
Ch. 1,
Ch. 2,
Ch. 3,
Ch. 4,
Ch. 5,
Ch. 6,
Ch. 7,
Ch. 8,
Ch. 9,
Ch. 10,
Ch. 11,
Ch. 12,
Syntax:

trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
trigger
CHANNEL

type threshold.
type sta/lta.
type threshold.
type threshold.
type threshold.
type threshold.
type threshold.
type threshold.
type threshold.
type threshold.
type threshold.
type threshold.
TRIGGER_TYPE = ch, trigger type[0=Threshold,1=sta/lta]

The parameters are:

unsigned char triggertype

These values are stored in locations within each channel.

Channel:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

March, 2006

K2 offsets:
2E0h
32Ch
378h
3C4h
410h
45Ch
4A8h
4F4h
540h

MW offsets:
3B8h
404h
450h
49Ch
4E8h
534h
580h
5CCh
618h

Channel:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Document 302219 Rev P

K2 offsets:
58Ch
5D8h
624h
-------------

MW offsets:
664h
6B0h
6FCh
748h
794h
7E0h
82Ch
878h
8C4h

Page 105

COMMENT cs
This parameter command enters a character string, which is enclosed in double quotes. cs = 0-32
characters, the NULL character terminator will be added. To enter the comment "This is a @#$
test", type at the EDIT>:
com "This is a @#$ test"<cr>

To display the current comment, type at the EDIT>:

com<cr>

Response:
Syntax: COMMENT = "string"
Comment: NORTH STATION ON MAIN BUILDING

The parameter is

char misc_rw_parms.comment[33]

K2 offset: 255h

MW offset: 32Dh

See DEF commands.

DEFAULT
This command will set all of the user selectable parameters to their default values. With
Application firmware 2.00 or later this command, DEFAULT normal, will not change the sensor
parameters: CHANNEL SENSOR, CHANNEL GAIN or CHANNEL CALIBRATION. To
issue this command, type at the EDIT> prompt:
def<cr>

Response:
Overwrite existing parameters with normal defaults(y/n)? n
Parameters not changed.

The DEFAULT commands will append the current Application firmware version to the comment
string such as "DEFAULT PARAMETERS v2.96" as well as the notations "FAC" or
"FAC+EEP" if factory default or EEPROM default options were used.

Page 106

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

DEFAULT FACTORY
This command, in Application firmware 2.00 or later, will default all user selectable parameters,
INCLUDING the sensor parameters. If the sensor attached to a channel is not a smart FBA with
eeprom, that channel' s CHANNEL SENSOR, CHANNEL GAIN and CHANNEL
CALIBRATION will be set to the sensor default of:
CHANNEL SENSOR type= 0, S/N= 0
CHANNEL GAIN = 1
CHANNEL CALIBRATION fullscale Volts= 2.5V, sensitivity Volts/unit = 1.250,
natural frequency= 0.0 , damping= 0.0
NOTE: The Makalu system defaults to a full scale of 20.0V, and to a sensitivity of 10.0V/G to
support a 2G sensor.
As of Application firmware version 2.42, the DEFAULT FACTORY command will present the
user with two questions, the first to ask whether or not the parameters should be set to the factory
defaults, the second question which will ask whether the EEPROM parameters should be set to
their defaults as well. It is possible to reset the parameters and not the EEPROM parameters, or to
reset both.
Previous to Application firmware version 2.42, only one question is asked and the EEPROM
parameters are not reset.
To issue this command, type at the EDIT> prompt:
def factory<cr>

Response:
Overwrite existing parameters with factory defaults? (y/n): y
Parameters set to defaults.
Overwrite EEPROM parameters with defaults? (y/n): y

If EEPROM parameters are reset, the following items are affected:

- Flat or Tree file structure
- Auto file delete
- GPS averaging
- Multiple alarm status (Etna only)
- Alarm duration
- DC offsets
- System log level
- Break (autobaud) disable
- Acquisition debug
The following EEPROM parameters are specifically NOT affected:
- Baud rate
- Password
- Restart count
- Event count

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 107

DFS BAUDRATE cd
This parameter command turns the Digital Field Station port output ON/OFF and sets the output
baud rate. The output is a RS-232C serial signal. cd = code [0]:
Code:
Baudrate:

0
Off

1
On @ 4800

2
On @ 9600

3
On @ 19200

To start the DFS port at 9600 baud type at the EDIT>:

dfs bau 2<cr>

To display the DFS BAUDRATE code, type at the EDIT>:

dfs bau<cr>

Response:
Syntax: DFS Baudrate Code [0=DFS Off, 1=4800, 2=9600, 3=19200 baud]
Digital Field Station Baudrate Code = 2

The parameter is
K2 offset: 288h

unsigned char misc_rw_parm.cutlerCode

MW offset: 360h

DFS DECIMATION cd
This parameter command selects 100sps or 50sps DFS output when using the CRLF protocol and
when the instrument sample rate is 100. When the instrument sample rate is 200, this parameter
has no effect.
0 = 1:1, no decimation[default]
1 = 1:2, filter & decimation by 2
To select 50sps output from the DFS port, type at the EDIT>:
dfs dec 1<cr>

To display the current setting, type at the EDIT>:

dfs dec<cr>

Response:
Syntax: DFS Decimation Factor [0=1:1(raw), 1=1:2, 2=1:4]
Digital Field Station Decimation Factor Code = 1

Page 108

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

The parameter is unsigned char cutler_decimation;

K2 offset: 28ah

MW offset: 362h

Note: code 2=1:4 is not supported. This parameter is not supported by the Altus Support
Software.

DFS PROTOCOL cd
This parameter command selects the protocol for the DFS output. cd = code: Note: the KMI20HZ
output is only available in the Mt. Whitney and K2.
0 = CRLF

1 = KMI20HZ

To select the CRLF protocol, type at the EDIT>:

dfs pro 0<cr>

To display the current setting, type at the EDIT>:

dfs pro<cr>

Response:
Syntax: DFS Protocol Code [0=CRLF, 1=KMI]
Digital Field Station Protocol Code = 1

The parameter is

unsigned char misc_rw_parm.cutler_protocol

K2 offset: 294h

MW offset: 36Ch

DFS SET c1 c2 .. cn
This parameter command selects the channels to be send out the DFS port [none]. ch = channel
number. Any channel may be selected. The limit for the CRLF protocol is any 3 channels. The
limit for the KMI20HZ protocol, available only in the Mt. Whitney, is 18 channels. To select the
maximum allowed channels enter a star '*' instead of the channel numbers. To select channels 3,
4 and 6, in a 6-channel K2, type at the EDIT>:
dfs set 3 4 6<cr>

To display the selected channels for the DFS port, type at the EDIT>:
dfs set<cr>

Response:
Syntax: DFS SET 1 3 4 6 or DFS SET *
16 Channel(s) Selected: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The parameter is

unsigned long misc_rw_parms.cutler_bitmap. Bit 0 = channel 1.

K2 offset: 28Ch

MW offset: 364h

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 109

GPS mp mm cc
This parameter command enters the three parameters controlling the GPS.
mp = power-on update interval (0 - 255 minutes) [30]
mm = minimum ON duration (0-255 minutes) [30]
cc = Control type (0 = Free field, 1 = Master, 2 = Slave) [0]
To turn the GPS Off, enter mm = 0 (both mm and mp may be set to zero). To turn the GPS on
continuously enter mp = 0 with mm = any positive non-zero number. mm must be less than or
equal to mp except when mp is set to zero. To space the GPS updates at 90 minutes and allow 10
minutes for the update to occur, type at the EDIT>:
gps 90 10 0<cr>

To display the current GPS settings, type at the EDIT>:

gps<cr>

Response:
GPS will be turned on every 0 minutes
GPS will be powered for a maximum of 30 minutes
Syntax: GPS = updateInterval_minutes, maxOn_minutes

NOTE: When using MASTER or SLAVE mode, GPS should be set to always on. e.g.: GPS 0 1 1
or GPS 0 1 2.
These parameters are:

unsigned char timing_rw_parms.gpsTurnOnInterval

unsigned char timing_rw_parms.gpsMaxTurnOnTime

These values are contiguous. Only the offset of the gpsTurnOnInterval is listed.
K2 offset:

2A8h

MW offset:

380h

HELP
List the parameter commands. Note: some of the regular terminal window commands are also
available in the EDIT window.
hel<cr>
A:
BITMAP
CELLULAR
COPY
DFS
HELP
LOCATION
MODEM
PW
RD
RX
SERIALNUMBER
STREAMS
USERCODE

Page 110

ABORT
BUF256
CHANNEL
DEFAULT
DIR
IRIG_TYPE
MD
NCHANNELS
Q
RENAME
SAVE
SITEID
TIME
UTCOFFSET

B:
CD
COMMENT
DEL
GPS
LOAD
MKDIR
PASSWORD
QUIT
RMDIR
SDSTREAM
STNID
TX

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

IRIG-TYPE cd
This parameter command selects the type of IRIG timecode that the MCU (Application firmware)
will generate. cd = (1) IRIG-E, (2) IRIG-H. To select IRIG-E, type
iri 1<cr>

To display the current setting, type at the EDIT>:

iri<cr>

Response:
Syntax: IRIG_TYPE Code [1=E, 2=H]
IRIG_TYPE Code = 2

The parameter is
K2 offset:

28Bh

unsigned char misc_rw_parms.cutler_irig_type

MW offset:

363h

LOCATION la lo el
This parameter command enters the documentary reference for the instrument location.
la = latitude (+/- 90.0000 North) [0]
lo = longitude (+/- 90.0000 East) [0]
el = elevation (+/- 32000 meters above sea level) [0]
To enter the location of Kinemetrics in Pasadena, type at the EDIT>:
loc 34.01 -118.02 268.0<cr>

To display the current setting, type at the EDIT>:

loc<cr>

Response:
Location: 34.01 N, -118.00 E, 268 meters
Syntax: LOCATION = latitude, longitude, elevation

These parameters are:

short misc_rw_parms.elevation
float misc_rw_parms.latitude
float misc_rw_parms.longitude

Note these values are contiguous and the following offset is for elevation.
K2 offset:

276h

MW:

34Eh

NOTE: If GPS is installed and these LOCATION values (latitude, longitude, and elevation) are
all 0, GPS averaging will be automatically selected. When GPS averaging is active, these
LOCATION values will be automatically updated. These values will not be permanently stored
unless the EDIT command is used to store them. Please refer to the section on GPS averaging for
further information.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 111

MODEM ANSWER
This parameter command sets the modem mode flag to allow the system to send the MODEM
initialization string to the modem at regular intervals. The call out condition flags are explicitly
cleared. This command will insure that the MODEM will be able to answer the phone when a call
is received. When the parameter command is entered, the current state of the modem mode flag is
reported and you are asked if you want to change it. When the state of the MODEM ANSWER
parameter is ON, the Monitor mode will time-out in 5 minutes of no activity and the Block mode
will time-out in 15 minutes. After a system reset or power down an instrument with an internal
modem will set the modem mode flag and will not change the call out condition flags. The setting
in the AUTOLOAD.PAR file is ignored. After a system reset or power down an instrument with
an external modem will not change the modem mode flag or the call out condition flags. The
commands DEFAULT (normal) and DEFAULT FACTORY will clear the modem mode flag,
disabling ANSWER and AUTOCALL modes. The LOAD of a .PAR file or the sending
parameters to the instrument with QuickTalk(r)'s Transmit-to-Recorder button will change the
parameter according to the setting sent. ANSWER mode is a subset of the AUTOCALL mode.
Also see the MODEM AUTOCALL command.
Bit set = Condition
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
others

Enable auto answer/ auto call out

Call out on low battery
Call out on battery charge failed
Call out on extreme temperature
Call out on event
Call out on GPS lock failure
Call out on alarm threshold exceed
Daily check in
reserved

- modem mode flag

- call out condition flag
- ""
- ""
- ""
- ""
- ""
- ""

To display the state of the modem mode flag, type at the EDIT>:
mod ans<cr>

Response:
Modem Auto Answer is currently off.
Do you wish to change this (Y/N)? y

OR
Modem Auto Answer is currently on.
Do you wish to change this (Y/N)? n

The parameter is
K2 offset:

Page 112

7C8h

unsigned char modem_rw_parms.flags

MW offset:

A80h

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

MODEM AUTOCALL
This parameter command is in the form of a dialog to toggle the modem mode flag and the callout
condition flags . If the modem mode flag is toggled to ON, initiate call out upon conditions, the
dialog continues to select the reasons for the call: Low Battery, Battery not charging, Extreme
temperature, an Event occurred or GPS Lock Failure. If the MODEM AUTOCALL parameter is
set to ON, it will time out Monitor mode in 5 minutes of inactivity and Block mode in 15
minutes. After a system reset or power down an instrument with an internal modem will set the
modem mode flag and will not change the call out condition flags. The setting in the
AUTOLOAD.PAR file is ignored. After a system reset or power down an instrument with an
external modem will not change the modem mode flag or the call out condition flags. The
commands DEFAULT (normal) and DEFAULT FACTORY will clear the modem mode flag,
disabling ANSWER and AUTOCALL modes. The LOAD of a .PAR file or the sending
parameters to the instrument with QuickTalk(r)'s Transmit-to-Recorder button will change the
parameter according to the setting sent. AUTOCALL mode includes ANSWER mode. Also see
the MODEM ANSWER command.
Bit set = Condition
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
others

Enable auto
Call out on
Call out on
Call out on
Call out on
Call out on
Call out on
Daily check
reserved

answer/ auto call out

low battery
battery charge failed
extreme temperature
event
GPS lock failure
alarm threshold exceed
in

- modem mode flag

- call out condition flag
""
""
""
""
""

To display the current setting of the MODEM AUTOCALL parameter flags and to change its
state, type at the EDIT>:
mod aut<cr>

Response:
Modem Auto Call Out is currently: OFF
Do you wish to change this (Y/N)? y
Call out on Low Battery (Y/N)? y
Call out on Battery Not Charging (Y/N)? y
Call out on Extreme Temperature (Y/N)? y
Call out on Event (Y/N)? y
Call out on GPS Lock Failure (Y/N)? y
Call out on Alarm Threshold Exceeded (Y/N)? y

OR
Modem Auto Call Out is currently: ON
Do you wish to change this (Y/N)? y

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 113

When call out condition flags are set, call out on system error is automatically enabled. System
errors are displayed in the call out message as follows:
FROM: Kinemetrics Altus Etna
S/N 970
Stn ID: PASA
Site ID: KMI SOUTH BLDG 1
Comment: DEFAULT PARAMETERS
Callout Msg: KINEMETRICS, INC., 222 VISTA AVE, PASADENA CA
DATE: Aug 30, 2000 08:25:17.000
MESSAGE(S):
SYSTEM ERROR:
FLASH CHIP ERROR
RAM ERROR AT address
PARAMETER ERROR
PCMCIA ERROR
DSP ERROR
FLASH CHIP REFRESH DUE
Press "\" to go to command line
* ans

The parameters CELLULAR DURATION and CELLULAR WARMUP affect the operation of
the AUTOCALL mode.
The parameter is
K2 offset:

7C8h

unsigned char modem_rw_parms.flags

MW offset:

A80h

MODEM CALLOUT_MESSAGE cs
This parameter command enters a character string to be included in any instrument initiated
telephone call. It can contain up to 45 alphanumeric characters. Added 7/96. [Application
firmware 2.00] To enter the string "This is a cell message.", type at the EDIT>:
mod cal "This is a cell message."<cr>

To see the current modem callout message, type at the EDIT>:

mod cal<cr>

Response:
Callout_message: This is a cell message.

The parameter is char, modem_rw_parms.callOut[46]

K2 offset: 7CAh

Page 114

MW offset: A82h

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

MODEM CHECKIN_TIME hh mm dd (hh=0-23 (-1=OFF), mm=0-59, dd=0-15)

Time value specifying time at which to generate a call out to check in with the central station,
providing for a positive indication from the recorder that the recorder and modem are able to
communicate. 'hh mm' is the time of day for call out (hh=0-23 (-1=OFF is default), mm=0-59);
'dd' is the number of days to skip between check in calls (dd=0-15).
Setting MODEM CHECKIN_TIME clears a counter so the system will call in on the next check
in time (prevents no check ins for 15 days when switching from 15 days to 0 days).
Requires MODEM AUTOCALL to be set. If the MODEM CHECKIN_TIME is cleared with the
command "MODEM CHECKIN_TIME -1", no timed callout will occur.

MODEM COMPLETE_CALL x (0=off, 1=on). [0].

When MODEM COMPLETE_CALL is enabled and AUTOCALL is correctly set up and
triggered, the system will call out until all call attempts are completed OR any call out is
terminated with the ANSWERMODE or CALLMODE command. Successful call termination is
logged (uses notation "Complete") if SYSTEM LOG is enabled and the call-out is terminated by
the ANSWERMODE or CALLMODE command. See SYSTEM LOG command for further
details.
If the user or host enters TERMINAL mode during callout and MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE is
enabled, the system resets the next pause to the minimum pause (MODEM PAUSE). Then if the
connection is not terminated by the ANSWERMODE or CALLMODE command, the system will
call back after the minimum pause between calls.
When MODEM COMPLETE_CALL is disabled and AUTOCALL is correctly set up and
triggered, the system will call out until all call attempts are completed OR the recorder connects
to the remote modem and positive callout acknowledgment is disabled, OR the recorder connects
to the remote modem and positive call out acknowledgment is enabled and is received within the
time-out period.
To display the current setting, type at the EDIT>:
mod com<cr>

Response:
Syntax: MODEM COMPLETE_CALLOUT = x (0=off, 1=on)Modem Complete_Callout = 0.xn

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 115

MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE n
where n = 0..254 minutes, default = 0.
This parameter can affect the pause between attempted calls and the number of
attempted calls during AUTOCALL. If n = 0, MODEM MAXDIALS & MODEM PAUSE
control the number of call attempts and the pause between call attempts.
(Each call attempt includes calling the secondary phone number if there is no
response from the primary phone number.) If the non-volatile memory location
where EXTEND_PAUSE is stored is 0xff (a possibility if the parameters have
not been defaulted) the value is treated by the firmware as a zero.
If n = 1..254, then both MODEM MAXDIALS & MODEM PAUSE operate differently
than described above. MODEM PAUSE specifies the pause if the first call
attempt fails. If the second call attempt fails, it is followed by a pause
of twice the time specified in MODEM PAUSE. After each failed call attempt
the pause is doubled from its previous value. This continues until the pause
value cannot be doubled without exceeding the product of 60 and MODEM
EXTEND_PAUSE. All of the call attempts with pause doubling in-between
constitutes 1 call cycle. After the end of a call cycle, the pause is reset
to its original value (MODEM PAUSE) before starting a new call cycle.
If n = 1..254, then the value of MODEM MAXDIALS is the number of call cycles,
not the number of call attempts.
MODEM PAUSE must be set to a value less than 60 times MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE.
Exiting EDIT mode with save while this condition is violated will generate
an error message and the system will remain in EDIT mode.
When extended pause is enabled due to correct settings of the 3 parameters,
messages are displayed which describe the number of calls in a call cycle,
the longest pause, the total number of call attempts, and the approximate
length of time to complete all call attempts.
With MODEM MAXDIALS set to 2 and MODEM PAUSE set to 10 seconds, setting
MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE to 1 minute produces the following:
EDIT> mod ext 1
Modem Extend_Pause = 1 min
Modem Extended Pause is enabled:
Retry attempts per cycle: 3
Total call attempts: 7
Max Pause: 40 sec
Total pause period: ~4 minutes

Three retries per cycle occur, with pauses of 10, 20, & 40 seconds. There is an original call, plus
2 cycles with 3 retries in each for 7 total call attempts. The sum of all the pauses is about 4
minutes.

Page 116

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

The wait for connection time (MODEM WAIT) is not included in the sum of all pauses as the
wait for connection time varies. If there is a dial tone but the modem cannot connect, the system
will wait the amount of seconds in MODEM WAIT. If there is no dial tone, the wait for
connection time expires when the modem sends the NO DIAL TONE message to the instrument.
The longest setting occurs with MODEM MAXDIALS set to 255, MODEM PAUSE set to seven
seconds, and MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE set to 254 minutes. This produces the following:
EDIT> mod ext 254
Modem Extend_Pause = 254 min
Modem Extended Pause is enabled:
Retry attempts per cycle: 12
Total call attempts: 3061
Max Pause: 14336 sec
Total pause period: ~85 days

Increasing MODEM PAUSE to 14 seconds keeps the total pause at ~85 days but reduces the call
attempts by ~250.
CPPC is turned off between call out attempts when the pause between calls is 60 seconds or
longer.

MODEM HANGUP cs
This parameter command enters the character string to instruct the attached modem to hang up
the phone. cs = character string (1-15 characters). Used in the ANSWER and AUTOCALL
modes. To enter the string "ATH0", type at the EDIT>:
mod han "ath0"<cr>

To display the current string, type at the EDIT>:

mod han<cr>

Response:
Syntax: MODEM HANGUP = string
Modem Hangup Command: ATH0

The parameter is
K2 offset:

March, 2006

724h

char modem_rw_parms.hangupCmd[16]
MW offset:

9DCh

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 117

MODEM INIT cs
This command enters the modem initialization string. cs = character string (1-63 characters).
Used in the ANSWER and AUTOCALL modes. It is very important that this string contain the
"E0", echo off, command. To enter the string "AT&FE0&C1S0=1&W" type at the EDIT>:
mod ini "at&fe0&c1s0=1&w"<cr>

To display the current string, type at the EDIT>:

mod ini<cr>

Response:
Syntax: MODEM INIT = string
Modem Initialization Command: AT&FE0&C1S0=1&W

The parameter is
K2 offset:

6C4h

char modem_rw_parms.initCmd[64]
MW offset:

97Ch

MODEM MAXDIAL n
This parameter command enters the number the instrument will try to dial a phone number when
in the AUTOCALL mode. n = number of tries (0 - 255). To set the number of tries to 4, type at
the EDIT>:
mod max 4<cr>

To display the current setting, type at the EDIT>:

mod max<cr>

Response:
Syntax: MODEM MAXDIALS = maxDialAttempts
Modem Max Dial Attempts = 2

The parameter is
K2 offset:

7B6h

unsigned char modem_rw_parms.maxDialAttemps

MW offset:

A6Eh

NOTE: Operation is affected by setting of MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE command. See

MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE for details.

Page 118

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

MODEM PAUSE n
This parameter command enters the number of seconds for the instrument to wait between phone
number dial attempts. n = number (0, 1-255 seconds). Enter zero, "0", and the modem pause
time will very in a random manner from 5 to 30 seconds (added 7/96 Application firmware 2.00).
Enter 1 to 255 for a fixed pause time. Default is 10 seconds. To enter 5 seconds, type at the
EDIT>:
mod pau 5<cr>

To display the current setting, type at the EDIT>:

mod pau<cr>

Response:
Syntax: MODEM PAUSE = seconds
Modem Pause Between Calls = 10 sec

CPPC is turned off between call out attempts when the pause between calls is 60
seconds or longer.
The parameter is
K2 offset:

unsigned char modem_rw_parms.pauseBetweenCalls

7B5h

MW offset:

A6Dh

NOTE: Operation is affected by setting of MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE command. See

MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE for details.

MODEM PHONENUMBER i n
This parameter command enters one of the two AUTOCALL phone numbers. The argument, i, is
the index for the phone numbers. Phone number 1 is called first, then phone number 2 is called
second. If the phone number is with the same area code as the instrument do not enter an area
code. n= the phone number (1-23 characters). To set the primary phone number to area code
818, phone number 795-2220, type at the EDIT>:
mod pho 1 8187952220<cr>

To display the current numbers type at the EDIT>:

mod pho<cr>

Response:
Syntax: MODEM PHONENUMBER = index, string
Event Alert Primary Phone #:
8187952220
Event Alert Alternate Phone #:
NONE

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 119

The parameter is

char modem_rw_parms.phoneNumber[4][24]

Phone Number
1
2
3
4

K2 offset
754h
76Ch
784h
79Ch

MW offset
A0Ch
A24h
A3Ch
A54h

Not Used
Not Used

MODEM PREFIX cs
This parameter command enters the prefix string to send to the modem before the phone number.
cs = character string (1-15 characters). To enter the string "ATDT", type at the EDIT>:
mod pre "atdt"<cr>

To display the current string, type at the EDIT>:

mod pre<cr>

Response:
Syntax: MODEM DIALING PREFIX = string
Modem Dialing Prefix: ATDT

The parameter is
K2 offset:

704h

char modem_rw_parms.dialingPrefix[16]
MW offset:

9BCh

MODEM SUFFIX cs
This parameter command enters the string to add to the end of the dialing string. cs = character
string (1-15 characters). To enter a suffix string "XXX", type at the EDIT>:
mod suf "xxx"<cr>

To display the current string, type

mod suf<cr>

Response:
Syntax: MODEM DIALING SUFFIX = string
Modem Dialing Suffix:

The parameter is
K2 offset:

Page 120

714h

char modem_rw_parms.dialing Suffix[16]

MW offset:

9CCh

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

MODEM WAIT s
This parameter command enters the number of seconds for the modem to wait for a carrier
connect. This is a time out limit. s = seconds (0-255). To enter 30 seconds, type at the EDIT>:
mod wai 30<cr>

To display the current value, type at the EDIT>:

mod wai<cr>

Response:
Syntax: MODEM WAIT = seconds
Modem Wait For Connection = 45 sec

The parameter is
K2 offset:

7B4h

unsigned char modem_rw_parms.waitForConnection

MW offset:

A6Ch

NCHANNELS n
This parameter command can be used to enter selected channels for recording when they are
continuous from channel One. n = the number of channels to record. Prior to Application
Firmware version 1.08 in the K2 and version 1.07 in the Mt. Whitney this was the only way to
enter channels for recording. Also see BITMAP. To record channels 1, 2, 3 and 4, type at the
EDIT>:
nch 4<cr>

To display the number of channels currently being recorded, type at the EDIT>:
nch<cr>

Response:
Syntax: NCHANNELS = numberOfChannels
Number of channels: 6

The parameter is
K2 offset:

March, 2006

24Eh

unsigned short misc_rw_parms.nchannels

MW offset:

326h

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 121

SDSTREAMS BITMAP c1 c2 .. c6
The SDSTREAMS BITMAP command enters the selected channels to be send out as the streams
in the Serial Data Stream. Its function is the same as the recording channel selector parameter
also named BITMAP under the parameter EDIT> editor. To send channels 2, 4 and 6 as streams
0, 1 and 2 type:
EDIT>sds bit 2 4 6<cr>

To examine the channels selected, type at the EDIT>:

EDIT>sds bit<cr>

Response:
Syntax: SDSTREAMS BITMAP 1 3 4 6 or BIT *
3 Channel(s) Selected: 2 4 6

NOTE: Selected SDSTREAMS channels must also be selected as recorded channels.

The parameter is stored as a 4-byte dword, bitmapped for the channels, bit 0 is channel 1. Default
is channels 1, 2, 3 & 4 for a 4 channel instrument and channels 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6 for a six, 12 or 18
channel instrument.

SDSTREAMS BUFFER_SIZE n
The SDSTREAMS BUFFER_SIZE parameter specifies the number of 16,384 byte units that
determine the size of the #SSTRBUF.BIN file on the instrument storage medium. The default is
64 for a 1Mbyte buffer file [64]. To set the parameter to 10 type:
EDIT>sds buf 10<cr>
Stream Buffer Size = 10 blocks, 163840 bytes

To examine the current setting type:

EDIT>sds buf<cr>
Syntax: SDSTREAMS BUFFER_SIZE = buffer size. Buffer size in 16K blocks
Stream Buffer Size = 64 blocks, 1048576 bytes

NOTE: If set to zero, no buffer is used. Not using a buffer will slightly reduce recorded 1Hz noise
on long records and makes use of the PCMCIA flash unnecessary for SDS streaming purposes. A
buffer size of zero is only useful in streaming modes 1 and 2, but will disable the ability to do
retries in the event of transmission errors. A buffer size of zero cannot be used with streaming
mode 3.
This parameter is stored as a 2-byte unsigned integer.
Due to system throughput and storage fragmentation issues, it is recommended that the stream
buffer file #SSTRBUF.BIN not be deleted for the purposes of saving storage space. When the file
is recreated at a later time, the file may not be able to be allocated in a single block - affecting
throughput. If SDSTREAMS is not intended to be used in the future, then the file may be deleted
to conserve storage space.

Page 122

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

SDSTREAMS FORMAT n
The SDSTREAMS FORMAT Serial Data Stream parameter specifies whether the data is
transmitted as 24-bit data samples or compressed, using a simple Difference algorithm. Default is
compressed.
Code
0
1

Format
uncompressed 24-bit data samples
Difference compression. [Default]

To select uncompressed type:

EDIT>sds for 0<cr>
Stream Format = 0

To examine the current setting, type:

EDIT>sds for<cr>
Syntax: SDSTREAMS FORMAT = dataFormat. 0 = uncompressed, 1 = compressed
Stream Format = 0

This parameter is stored as an unsigned byte.

SDSTREAMS SAMPLE_RATE n
The SDSTREAMS SAMPLE_RATE, which must be set to the same value as the instrument
stream sample rate value (STR SPS). Pre-v2.90 firmware supports streaming data at only 100sps.
v2.90 and later supports sampling rates of 20, 40, 50, 100, 200, and 250sps. Default = 0 (Off) [0].
To turn-off the Serial Data Stream set the SAMPLE_RATE to 0 by typing:
EDIT> sds sam 0<cr>
Stream Sample Rate = 0 samples per second.

To examine the SAMPLE_RATE type:

EDIT> sds sam<cr>
Syntax: SDSTREAMS SAMPLE_RATE = sample rate.
Stream Sample Rate = 100 samples per second.

This parameter is stored as a 2-byte unsigned integer.

If the SDS SAMPLE_RATE and the acquisition STREAMS SPS are equal, the message
"Serial Data Streaming enabled"
will appear as part of the AcQuisition ON sign-on. If the SDS SAMPLE_RATE and the
acquisition STREAMS SPS are not equal, the message:
"Stream scan rate does not match acquisition scan rate"
"Serial Data Streaming disabled"
will appear as part of the Acquisition ON sign-on.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 123

SDSTREAMS TIMEOUT n
The SDSTREAMS TIMEOUT parameter selects one of three operating modes for the Serial Data
Stream.
Mode
---1

Enter
----0

Automatic transmission of stream from startup.

Default mode.

6..32767

Automatic transmission of stream from startup.

With added requirement that a 'CONTINUE'
command be sent every n blocks by the Host
computer to keep the stream transmitting.
n = Number between 6 and 32767. Note for the
Host programmer: send the first 'CONTINUE'
command to start transmission.

-1

Host command driven transfer. A Host command

is required for each stream of each block.

To set the timeout, enter:

EDIT>sds tim 10<cr>
Stream Timeout = 10

To examine the current setting type:

EDIT>sds tim<cr>
Syntax: SDSTREAMS TIMEOUT = timeout. Stream mode 2 timeout in blocks
Stream Timeout = 10

This parameter is stored as a 2-byte unsigned integer.

SERIALNUMBER n
This parameter command enters the serial number of the Altus instrument. n = serial number
(100-65535). To enter the serial number, 45, type at the EDIT>:
ser 45<cr>

To display the currently entered serial number, type at the EDIT>:

ser<cr>

Response:
Syntax: SERIALNUMBER = serialNumber
Serial number: 107

The parameter is
K2 offset:

Page 124

24Ch

unsigned short misc_rw_parms.serialNumber

MW offset:

324h

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

SITEID cs
This parameter command enters a 16 character NULL terminated string to additionally identify
the instrument-record station. cs = alphanumeric character string (1-16). Added 7/96.
[Application firmware 2.00] Included in any instrument initiated telephone call. To add the
identification "SOUTH BLDG", type at the EDIT>:
sit "south bldg"<cr>

To examine the current string, type at the EDIT>:

sit<cr>

Response:
Site ID: SOUTH BLDG

This parameter is char, misc._rw_parms.siteID[17]

K2 offset: 295h MW offset: 36Dh

STNID cs
This parameter command enters a 4 character NULL terminated string to identify the instrumentrecording station. cs = alphanumeric character string(1-4). [Application firmware 2.00: included
in any instrument initiated telephone call.] To name the instrument location, station "alfa", type
at the EDIT>:
stn "alfa"<cr>

To display the current station ID, type at the EDIT>:

stn<cr>

Response:
STNID = string (up to 4 characters)
Station ID: PAS1

The parameter is
K2 offset:

March, 2006

250h

char misc_rw_parms.stnID[5]
MW offset:

328h

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 125

STREAM APW s
This parameter command enters an Array Propagation Window, a time in seconds to stretch the
trigger (trigger hold time) to allow a wave front to pass from one side of an instrument array to
the other. s - hold time in seconds (1-65000) [0]. To enter an APW of 30 seconds, type at the
EDIT>:
str apw 30<cr>

To display the current setting for the APW, type at the EDIT>:
str apw<cr>

Response:
Syntax: STREAM APW = apwTime (in seconds)
Array propagation window = 0 sec.

The parameter is
K2 offset:

664h

unsigned short stream_rw_parms.apw

MW offset:

904h

STREAM FILTER n
In the K2, Mt. Whitney, and Makalu, this parameter is used to select the recorded data final antialias filter type, either as non-causal or causal. The default is non-causal [0]. Selecting the causal
filter will use a filter with a bandwidth of 40% of the sampling frequency and an asymmetrical
impulse response with no ringing before the signal, but more ringing after the impulse. To select
the causal filter, type at the EDIT>:
str fil 1<cr>

To display the current filter type, type at the EDIT>:

str fil<cr>

Response:
Syntax: STREAM FILTER n (n = 0 for non-causal, 1 for causal filter.)
Filter type causal.

The parameter is
K2 offset:

Page 126

671h

unsigned char stream_rw_parms.FilterType

MW offset:

911h

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

STREAM FT st
This parameter command changes the Auto Functional Test after Event flag. st = ON/OFF To
turn ON the Auto Functional Test, type at the EDIT>:
str ft on<cr>

Response:
Auto FT after event is: ON
Syntax: STREAM FT [ON | OFF]

The parameter is:

K2 offset:

658h

unsigned char stream_rw_parms.filterFlag,

bit #1 = set, auto FT after event
MW offset:

8F8h

NOTE: Auto FT after event will be suppressed if auto file delete (AQ AUTO_DELETE) is on.
The two functions are mutually exclusive, and auto file delete has priority.

STREAM PREEVENT s
This parameter command enters the amount of pre-event memory to use in seconds. s = seconds
(0-65000) [3]. The maximum number of seconds is dependent upon the number of channels, the
sample rate and the instrument. A safe guideline is "5 seconds at 200sps for the maximum
number of channels". At the current time, if the number of seconds entered exceeds the allowed
number for the sps - # channels combination, the instrument will not go into acquisition and a
message will appear at the end of the Acquisition sign-on. In the Mt. Whitney the maximum
allowable pre-event for 18 channels at 200sps with the fastest available recording media is 23
seconds. The maximum pre-event memory for a standard K2 with 3 channels is 45 seconds.
Also use of slower recording media than that shipped with the recorder may compromise the
instruments recording capabilities.. To record 5 seconds of signal prior to the trigger time, type at
the EDIT>:
str pre 5<cr>

To display the current pre-event setting, type at the EDIT>:

str pre<cr>

Response:
Syntax: STREAM PREEVENT = duration (in seconds)
Pre-event = 3 sec.

The parameter is
K2 offset:

March, 2006

666h

unsigned short stream_rw_parms.preEvent

MW offset:

906h

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 127

STREAM POSTEVENT s
This parameter command enters the number of seconds that an event will record after the
detrigger criteria is met, post-event time. s = seconds (0-65000) [10]. To enter 12 seconds for the
post-event time, type at the EDIT>:
str pos 12<cr>

To display the current post-event time, type at the EDIT>:

str pos<cr>

Response:
Syntax: STREAM POSTEVENT = duration (in seconds)
Post-event = 10 sec.

The parameter is
K2 offset:

668h

unsigned short stream-rw_parms.postEvent

MW offset:

908h

STREAM MINRUNTIME s
This parameter command enters the minimum number of seconds that an event is to record. s =
seconds (0-65000) [0]. This is used primarily to guarantee that a recorded time code will contain
a complete frame. To enter a minimum run time of 61 seconds, type at the EDIT>:
str min 61<cr>

To display the current setting, type at the EDIT>:

str min<cr>

Response:
Syntax: STREAM MINRUNTIME = duration (in seconds)
Minimum run time = 30 sec.

The parameter is
K2 offset:

Page 128

66Ah

unsigned short stream_rw_parms.minRunTime

MW offset:

90Ah

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

STREAM SPS n
This parameter command enters the instrument sampling rate in samples per second. n = samples
per second (20, 40, 50, 100, 200 or 250) [200]. To record at 100sps, type at the EDIT>:
str sps 100<cr>

To display the current setting, type at the EDIT>:

str sps<cr>

Response:
Syntax: STREAM SPS = samplesPerSecond
Sampling rate = 200 sps

NOTE: Be careful when using higher sample rates, as the number of channels that can be used
will be limited by the flash memory. As of this writing, SanDisk flash memory cards will only
reliably support sample rates of 250sps for up to twelve (12) channels. These cards will support
sample rates of 200sps and below for any number of channels.
The parameter is
K2 offset:

unsigned short stream_rw_parms.sps

662h

MW offset:

902h

STREAM STORAGE pd sd
This parameter command select the primary and secondary storage media in the instrument [A
A]. The storage devices can be inserted in Slot A, Drive A or Slot B, Drive B. When only one
media is inserted, it must be in Slot A. pd = primary device (A or B). sd = secondary device (A or
B). To select the only disk drive inserted (in Slot A) as the primary recording media, type at the
EDIT>:
str sto A A<cr>

To display the settings, type at the EDIT>:

str sto<cr>

Response:
Primary storage is drive A:
Secondary storage is drive A:
Syntax: STREAM STORAGE = primaryDrive, secondaryDrive

The parameters are:

unsigned char stream_rw_parms.primaryStorage

unsigned char stream_rw_parms.secondaryStorage

Drive A = 0, Drive B = 1. Note these values are contiguous in the header space. The address
below is for the ...primaryStorage.
K2 offset:

March, 2006

659H

MW offset:

8F9h

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 129

STREAM THRESHOLD tn dn
This parameter command enters the stream voting threshold, TOTAL VOTES TO
TRIGGER/DETRIGGER, for the instrument system. tn = total trigger votes (0 - 10000) [1] dn =
total detrigger votes (0 - 10000) [1]. To enter a total votes trigger & detrigger value of 3, type at
the EDIT>:
str thr 3 3<cr>

This would require three votes (perhaps three channels) to trigger, and less than three to detrigger.
This would protect against one or two vote false triggers, and allow detriggering when the
number of votes falls below three.
Another application would be as follows:
str thr 3 1<cr>

This would require three votes (perhaps three channels) to trigger, and less than one to detrigger.
This would protect against one or two vote false triggers, and would require less than one vote
before detriggering. This example allows for extended recording of later seismic phases and coda
waves by continuing recording with fewer votes. Such recording is normally desired in
seismological weak motion applications. Be aware however that lower total votes to detrigger
values increase the risk of not detriggering when desired (or in extreme cases not detriggering at
all).
NOTE: Firmware version 2.54 accepts zero (0) votes to trigger AND zero (0) votes to detrigger
as valid arguments. In this situation, "AQ ON" will cause the recorder to immediately trigger and
record continuously until "AQ OFF" or until the storage is filled.
To display the current setting, type at the EDIT>:
str thr<cr>

Response:
Trigger threshold = 1, Detrigger threshold = 1 votes
Syntax: STREAM THRESHOLD = trigger_threshold_votes, detrigger_threshold_votes

The parameters are:

short stream_rw_parms.triggerThreshold
short stream_rw_parms.detriggerThreshold

Note these values are contiguous. The offset below is for the ...triggerThreshold.
K2 offset:

Page 130

66Ch

MW offset:

90Ch

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

STREAM VOTERS x v [x v]
This parameter command enters the sources and number of votes for each source. x = the source.
v = # of votes (100). The sources are:
'Cx' =
'K' =
'E' =
'N' =

channel, where x is the channel number (c1..c12 / c1..c18) [1]

keyboard [1]
external trigger [1]
network, not used at this time [1]

The channels and other sources are not assigned a permanent address in the header space. There
is an array of voter structures (K2 header has 15 and Mt. Whitney header has 21). One structure
for each possible channel and the Keyboard, External Trigger and Network (not used). When the
number of sources is less than maximum, the structure following the last voter is filled with 0x00
in the voter.type location.
Note: All voters must be listed in one command.
To enter one vote for channel 1, 2, 3 and an external trigger, type
str vot c1 1 c2 1 c3 1 e 1<cr>

To display the current setting, type at the EDIT>:

str vot<cr>

Response:
Voters (weight):
Ch. 1 (1), Ch. 2 (1), Ch. 3 (1), Ch. 4 (1),
Ch. 5 (1), Ch. 6 (1), Ch. 7 (1), Ch. 8 (1),
Ch. 9 (1), Ch. 10 (1), Ch. 11 (1), Ch. 12 (1),
Network (1), Keyboard (1), External (1)
Syntax: STREAM VOTING = src1, weight1, src2, weight2,...(src = Cn, N, K, E)

The parameter is an array structure. Each voter is:

unsigned char
unsigned char
short

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

.type ( 'C','K', 'E', 'N')

.number (0..11, 0..17, only if 'C')
.weight (# votes)

Page 131

The offset address in the following is for the .type variable of each structure.
Voter:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

K2 offsets:
688h
68Ch
690h
694h
698h
69Ch
6A0h
6A4h
6A8h
6ACh
6B0h

MW offsets:
928h
92Ch
930h
934h
938h
93Ch
940h
944h
948h
94Ch
950h

Voter:
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

K2 offsets:
6B4h
6B8h
6BCh
6C0h
-------------

MW offsets:
954h
958h
95Ch
960h
964h
968h
96Ch
970h
974h
978h

AN EXAMPLE OF VOTER ASSIGNMENTS

+ = Logical OR
* = Logical AND
x = Don't care
Total
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ext Votes

Page 132

Boolean

Enter

1+2+3+4+Ext

str vot c1 1 c2 1 c3 1 c4 1 e 1
str thr 1 1

1*2*3*4*Ext

str vot c1 1 c2 1 c3 1 c4 1 e 1
sth thr 5 5

2 +(1*3)

str vot c1 1 c2 2 c3 1
str thr 2 2

-1

2* (NOT Ext)

str vot c2 2 e -1
str thr 2 2

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

USERCODE n v
This parameter command enters four code numbers. They can be for any purpose the user
chooses. n = code number (1 - 4) v = value (-32768 .. +32767) [0]. To enter 578 as user code
#2, type at the EDIT>:
usr 2 578<cr>

To display the current user codes, type at the EDIT>:

usr<cr>

Response:
User codes: [0] [0] [0] [0]
Syntax: USERCODE = number, value

The parameter is
K2 offset:

280h

short

misc_rw_parms.userCodes[4]
MW offset:

358h

UTCOFFSET n
This parameter command enter the local time offset from UTC time. If non-zero and GPS is used
for time updates, the GPS time will be adjusted by the UTC offset to record all times in local
time. n = +/-24.00 hours [0.00]. To record the times in local Pasadena time, Pacific Daylight
Time, type at the EDIT>:
utc -7<cr>

To display the current setting, type at the EDIT>:

utc<cr>

Response:
Syntax: UTCOFFSET
UTC offset: -7.00
(NOTE: UTC offset
Syntax: UTCOFFSET
UTC offset: -7.00
(NOTE: UTC offset

= hoursFromUTC
hours
takes effect on next GPS update)
= hoursFromUTC
hours
takes effect on next GPS update)

The parameter is short timing_rw_parms.localOffset

K2 offset:

2B0h

MW offset:

388h

NOTE 1: To enter a non-integer number of hours for the UTC offset (such as 5.5 hours for India),
enter the parameter as 5.5.
NOTE 2: UTC offset is normally stored as number of hours relative to UTC, and is an integer
between +24 and -24. If a non-integer number of hours is entered (such as 5.5), then the UTC
offset is stored as minutes relative to UTC (5.5 hours equals 330 minutes). The firmware
correctly handles the parameter based on the magnitude of the value. Support software that
processes this value must handle the parameter correctly if non-integer hours are a possibility.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 133

Other Header Values that can only be displayed

FIRMWARE VERSIONS
System Block firmware version
BootLoader firmware version
Application firmware version
DSP firmware version
Use the main command VERSION to display the versions of the installed firmware.
VERSION display:
K2 Strong Motion Software 02.884/6/12 Channels. P/N 302292.Copyright (c)
2000 Kinemetrics, Inc.Last Revised: September 12, 2000Boot Block Version
01.11.xn
Please note that as of Application version 2.88, the Application and DSP
blocks are now combined into a single image, so the DSP version number is
no longer displayed by the VER command. If you need to know the DSP version
number, you can use the VER KMI command, that will display as follows:
K2 Strong Motion Software 02.884/6/12 Channels. P/N 302292.Copyright (c)
2000 Kinemetrics, Inc.Last Revised: September 12, 2000KMI Internal Version:
v2.88.130
DSP Block Version 08.89Boot Block Version
01.11.xn
K2 &
012h
//
014h
//
016h
//
018h
//

MW offset
unsigned short
misc_ro_parms.sysBlkVersion
sys block version * 100
unsigned short
misc_ro_parms.bootBlkVersion
boot block version * 100
unsigned short
misc_ro_parms.appBlkVersion
app block version * 100
unsigned short
misc_ro_parms.dspBlockVersion
DSP version * 100

INSTRUMENT STATUS
Restart Status byte
Clock Source
Battery Voltage
Temperature
Use the main command STATUS to display the Restart count, the Restart
Status, byte, last restart time, current time, current clock source, GPS
present, On/Off, Acquisition On/Off, Alarm On/Off, battery voltage, the
temperature and the state of the Disk Drives.
Restart Code Cause
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x04
0x08
0x10
0x20
0x40
0x80

Page 134

Unknown
Not used
CPU RESET instruction
Loss of Clock frequency reference
Not used
Halt monitor reset
Software watchdog reset
Power up from hardware reset
External signal

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Source of last time update. Four sources defined:

0 = Real Time Clock from cold start - default time starting at
January 1, 1980
00:00:00.000
1 = Keyboard -- enter time with main command TIME y,m,d,h,m,s
2 = Sync with external reference pulse
3 = Internal GPS
To display the main status display, type at the '*' prompt:
sta<cr>

Response:
STATUS display:
Status for Recorder SKMI S/N 970
Restart Counts: 1031 (reset status: 20)
Restart Time: May 10, 2000 16:16:12.000
Current Time: May 11, 2000 09:02:44.000 (GPS)
Last GPS Lock: May 11, 2000 09:02:04.000
GPS: ON (locked)
Events: 159 (Errors: 0)
Acquisition: ON (NOT TRIGGERED)
Alarm: TRIGGERED
Battery: 13.4 V
Temperature: 26.7 C
PEM Banks: 1
Drive A: 4 MB FREE B: No Card

GPS Information:
GPS: ON (locked)

GPS: ON (unlocked)

GPS: ON
GPS: OFF

GPS module is on, clock source is GPS, and GPS

is locked; time is valid
GPS module is on, clock source is GPS, and GPS
is unlocked; use last GPS lock time to evaluate
time quality
GPS module is on, clock source is not GPS
GPS module is off; if clock source is GPS, use
last GPS lock time to evaluate time quality
GPS module not detected during boot
GPS is in slave mode and is getting time

GPS: NONE
GPS: SLAVE (locked)
packets
from the GPS master. Slave is locked to the
master
GPS: SLAVE (unlocked) - GPS is in slave mode and is NOT getting time
packets from the GPS master. Slave is NOT
locked to the master
GPS: SLAVE
- GPS slave mode but has not yet NOT gotten time
from the master

K2 & MW offset
00Ah
01Ah
charging
020h
038h

March, 2006

unsigned char misc_ro_parms.restartSource

short misc_ro_parms.batteryVoltage
// voltage * 10, negative =
short misc_ro_parms.temperature
// degrees C * 10
unsigned char misc_ro_parms.clockSource

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 135

GPS STATUS
GPS Lock Fail Count

Count of number of times GPS failed to lock with

the gpsMaxTurnOn time.
GPS Update Clock Count
Count of number of time GPS updated the internal clock.
GPS Last Two Turn On Times Previous two times that the GPS turned on its power.
GPS Last Two Lock Times
Previous two times that the GPS Locked,
most accurate time resolution.
GPS Last Two Update Times Previous two times that the GPS updated the internal clock.
GPS Last Two Drifts
Difference between GPS and the internal clock at last two
updates.
GPS Status Byte
Bit 0 = 1 if currently checking for presence of GPS board
Bit 1 = 1 if GPS board is present
Bit 2 = 1 if an error communication with the GPS has occurred
Bit 3 = 1 if GPS failed to lock with in gpsMaxTurnOnTime
Bit 4 = 1 if GPS not locked
Bit 5 = 1 when GPS power is ON
Bit 6,7
undefined
GPS receiver State of Health Byte
Byte value
00h
Doing position fixes.
01h
Don't have GPS time yet.
03h
PDOP is too high.
08h
No usable satellites.
09h
Only 1 usable satellite.
0Ah
Only 2 usable satellites.
0Bh
Only 3 usable satellites.
0Ch
The chosen satellite is unusable.
GPS Latitude
Latitude reported by GPS receiver
GPS Longitude
Longitude reported by GPS receiver
GPS Altitude
Altitude reported by GPS receiver
GPS antenna
Status of the electrical connection between the GPS
antenna and GPS module.
The message will indicate either:
GPS antenna: OK
or
GPS antenna: open/shorted
or
GPS antenna: status unavailable
The third condition can occur when the GPS module is installed but always off,
or if the module was detected during boot but the instrument is not receiving
packets from it.
While the GPS module is powered off, antenna status reports the last status
received while the module was on. Antenna status changes that occur while the
module is off will not be reported until the next time the module is powered on.

Page 136

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

To display the GPS Status, type at the DG>:

gps sta<cr>

Response:
GPS STATUS display:
Power is OFF (Free Field Mode)
No. of RTC Updates: 0
No. of Failed Locks: 0
Last GPS Lock At : May 11, 2000 11:08:04.000
Last Powered Up At: May 11, 2000 11:08:01.000
Last GPS Lock At : May 11, 2000 11:05:34.000
Last Powered Up At: May 11, 2000 10:38:01.000
Last Position:
34.148659N -118.102356E 202m
Average Position:
34.148647N -118.102394E 209m 7 samples
Next Power Up Time: May 11, 2000 11:38:01.000
DAC Value (Current): 2396
DAC Value (Dithered): 2395.6
DAC Value (in EEPROM): 2373
GPS antenna: OK

K2 & MW offset
039h
03Ah
040h
042h
046h
048h
04Ah
04Ch
050h, 052h
054h, 058h
05Ch, 060h
064h, 068h

unsigned char
unsigned char
unsigned short
unsigned short
short
short
short
unsigned short
short
unsigned long
unsigned long
unsigned long

timing_ro_parms.gpsStatus
timing_rp_parms.gpsSOH
timing_ro_parms.gpsLockFailCount
timing_ro_parms.gpsUpdateRTCCount
timing_ro_parms.gpsLatitude
timing_ro_parms.gpsLongitude
timing_ro_parms.gpsAltitude
timing_ro_parms.dacCount
timing_ro_parms.gpsLastDrift[2]
timing_ro_parms.gpsLastTurnOnTime[2]
timing_ro_parms.gpsLastUpdataeTime[2]
timing_ro_parms.gpsLastLockTime[2]

Of the parameters that record the 'last two', the one with the lower address is the most
recent.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 137

5. The Diagnostic Commands - Monitor Mode

The Diagnostic Commands

ABORT
Return to main command prompt.

ADC
Displays signal monitors and temperature. Eight values displayed:
+12V SWITCHED, 0 - 20VDC
RAM BATT, 0 - 5VDC (not used)
TEMP, degrees C, -39C - +89C
Hex Counts (not used)
CHARGER, 0 - 35VDC
INT BATT, 0 - 20VDC
EXT BATT, 0 - 20VDC
(Reserved), 0 - 20VDC

ALARM ON/OFF/n
ALARM ON
Turns alarm on for a K2 or Mt. Whitney.
ALARM n
Turns alarm 'n' on for an Etna.
ALARM OFF
Turns alarms off.

BAT n
This command tests the internal instrument battery. The command is available for the K2 and
Makalu platforms.

CAL
Calibrates the Makalu or New Etna data channels by computing a scale factor for each input
channel. The calibration data is stored in the Serial EEPROM of the Makalu ADC boards or the
Etna main board.
NOTE: This command is intended for factory use only, and should not be used by the end user.

DAC n
Sets a new DAC value. The DAC is used to control the oscillator frequency. If you are using a
GPS board, the DAC is automatically adjusted to keep the oscillator in phase with GPS time. n =
nothing or 0 - 4096. If n = nothing the current DAC value is displayed and you are asked to
increment it, decrement it or QUIT.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 139

DUMP a b
Displays a section of memory. a = the memory start address, b = byte count

DVM
Displays channel signals (same as AQ DVM command). Only available if AQ ON.

EEPROM
Starts EEPROM diagnostics.

EPISENSOR GAIN
Allows user to change the gain parameter in the EpiSensor internal deck EEPROM to
accommodate possible jumper changes.

EPISENSOR RANGE
Allows user to change the range parameter in the EpiSensor internal deck EEPROM to
accommodate possible jumper changes.

FORMAT
Formats and checks each disk sector. This command takes a very LONG TIME to complete!

GPIN
The GPIN command displays the 16 general purpose I/O port pins. (Application firmware 2.00)

GPOUT h
The GPOUT command saves the current setting general purpose I/O output pins and then sets the
pins equal to h, a 16-bit hexadecimal number. (Application firmware 2.00)

GPS AVERAGING n
Enables or disables GPS averaging mode. Use 0 to disable and 1 to enable GPS averaging.

GPS CLEAR n
Clears GPS counters. Use 1 to clear GPS update count, 2 to clear GPS failed locks count.

GPS DEFAULT
Selects the default values for the GPS PARAMETERS. These values are: GPS Dynamics mode =
1; Elevation Angle = 4.0; Signal level mask = 2.2; PDOP Mask = 12.0; PDOP Switch = 5.0.

GPS DIAGNOSTICS
Enter GPS diagnostic mode. MUST have a GPS board installed. Commands: h = health, s =
signal levels, t = time, z = GPS status, c = clock sync, f = GPS firmware version, Q = QUIT.

GPS ON
Manually power up the GPS board.

GPS OFF
Manually power down the GPS board.

Page 140

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

GPS PARAMETERS mod ang sig msk sw

Allows the user to select the parameters that the GPS receiver uses to control the satellites used
for position computation.

GPS PULSE_COUNT n
Allows the user to specify the number of pulses generated by the GPS module on power up of the
GPS module.

GPS RESTART
Restarts the GPS averaging accumulators.

GPS STATUS
Displays GPS status.

GPS SYNC
Synchronizes the system's clocks. This command is also available using the 'C' command in the
GPS DIAGNOSTICS.

HELP
Lists Diagnostic commands.

INIT n:
This command may be used to restore an unreadable disk drive. Use one of the "FORMAT n:"
commands to reformat the disk drive. n:= drive letter. This command writes the pattern '00h' into
the partition sector of the disk drive. It is intended as a last resort disaster recovery tool and will
destroy all data on the disk drive.

LED DEBUG
Displays LED actions as text output.

LED SET
Allows the technician to manually control the LEDs.

LED START
Starts the LED status display.

LED STOP
Stops the LED status display.

MEMTEST
Performs memory test. Checksum of Flash sections 0 - 15.

PLL
Tests for lock of the Phase Lock Loop. (Application firmware 2.00)

QUIT
Return to main command prompt.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 141

RAM
Displays amount of available RAM in bytes.

STACK INIT
Initializes the stack for each task so the STACK TEST command reports the correct information.

STACK TEST
Reports information on each task's stack usage.

TIME
Displays times of all internal clocks: GPS 1PPS, Heartbeat, 1KHz, 1Hz and RTC.

TRIGGER_OUT time code

This command sends the filtered trigger stream to be recorded using the "code" selected pattern
for the next "time" minutes (0<n<60) instead of the actual seismic data. Setting time=0 cancels
the command.

The Diagnostic Commands - Detailed Description

All of the following parameter entry commands take place at the Diagnostic prompt DG>. To
receive help for any diagnostic command, type the command without any arguments.

ABORT
This command cancels the Diagnostic prompt and returns to the main star, '*', prompt.

ADC
This command displays eight values, voltages and the temperature. To start the display, type:
* adc<cr>

Typical K2 and Mt. Whitney response:

Starting CPU16 ADC...
Press any key to abort
13.410V
0.019V 30.271C 002
24.294V 12.630V 13.180V
0.078V
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reserved
|
|
|
|
|
|
Ext Battery, 0-20VDC
|
|
|
|
|
Int Battery, 0-20VDC
|
|
|
| Charger, 0-35VDC
|
|
|
Hex Count (not used)
|
|
Temperature, -39C - +89C
|
RAM Battery, 0-5VDC (not used)
+12V Switched, 0-20VDC

Not password protected.

Page 142

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

ALARM ON/OFF/n
This command turns the alarm signal ON or OFF. The form of the command is:
DG> ala on<cr>
DG> ala off<cr>
DG> ala n<cr>

(K2 or Mt. Whitney only)

(Turns off all alarms)
(Etna only)

BLOCK mode:

Command Packet
PKC_RESETALARM

Response Packet
PKR_ACK

ALARM n
This command turns the selected alarm signal ON on an Etna. The Etna supports up to three
alarm signals, so the appropriate alarm (1 to 3) must be specified. The form of the command is:
DG> ala 1<cr>

ALARM ON
This command turns the alarm signal ON on a K2 or Mt. Whitney. The form
of the command is:
DG> ala on<cr>

ALARM OFF
This command turns the alarm signals OFF. The form
of the command is:
DG> ala off<cr>

This command can be password protected.

BAT n
BATTERY minutes (1-60)
This command tests the internal instrument battery. The argument is the length of the test in
minutes. Valid values are from one to sixty minutes.
The command is available for the K2 and Makalu platforms. This feature is not available in the
Etna series or the Mt. Whitney as it is not supported in hardware in either platform.
CAUTION: RUNNING THIS TEST WITH NO BATTERY OR A BATTERY UNABLE
TO POWER THE INSTRUMENT (SHORTED CELLS, UNDERCHARGED, ETC.) WILL
RESULT IN A SYSTEM RESET.
As part of the test the charger is disabled forcing the instrument to run on the battery for the
number of minutes specified. Internal test circuitry measures the battery voltage. At the end of the
test, this voltage is reported. Any key press during the test will abort the test. It takes a maximum
of 5 seconds after the end of the test until the charger is automatically reconnected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 143

The charge light on the LED display is not affected by this command - its only function is to
indicate when the charger is supplying sufficient voltage.
This command can be password protected.
Syntax message:
DG> bat
Syntax: BATTERY minutes (1-60)

Example of normal test:

DG> bat 1
Starting battery test...
SYSTEM RESET indicates test failure
Press any key to abort
Seconds remaining:
0
Battery voltage:

11.765V

DG>

Example of aborted test:

DG> bat
Syntax: BATTERY minutes (1-60)
DG> bat 1
Starting battery test...
SYSTEM RESET indicates test failure
Press any key to abort
Seconds remaining:
53
Test aborted
DG>

Example of failed test:

DG> bat 1
Starting battery test...
SYSTEM RESET indicates test failure
Press any key to abort
Seconds remaining:
60
*** SYSTEM RESET ***
Boot Loader Program P/N 302290 for New MCU P/N 109445.
Version 1.10
Last revised: September 18, 1998
(c)Kinemetrics, Inc. 1998
Press <Space> to enter Boot Loader
Press any other key to run Application Program.
. . . . .

Page 144

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

CAL
Calibrates the Makalu or New Etna data channels by computing a scale factor for each input
channel. The calibration data is stored in the Serial EEPROM of the Makalu ADC boards or the
Etna main board.
NOTE: This command is intended for factory use only, and should not be used by the end user.

DAC [n]
This command can set a new DAC value. The DAC value is used to control the oscillator
frequency. If you are using a GPS board, the DAC is automatically adjusted to keep the oscillator
in phase with the GPS time. n = 0 - 4096. If 'DAC' is entered without a numerical argument, the
current DAC value is displayed. You are then asked to increment it, decrement it or QUIT. To
display the current DAC value, type:
DG> DAC<cr>

The K2 response:
Syntax: DAC = 12_bit_number
DAC Value (Current): 2516
DAC Value (in EEPROM): 2516
DAC = 12_bit_number
Current DAC Value: 2516
[+,-,Q]> q
DAC Value (Current): 2516
DAC Value (in EEPROM): 2516
DG>

The Mt. Whitney response:

Syntax: DAC = 12_bit_number
DAC Value (Current): 2154
DAC Value (in EEPROM): 2155
DAC = 12_bit_number
Current DAC Value: 2154
[+,-,Q]> q
Save the current DAC value to EEPROM? (Y/N)n
DAC Value (Current): 2154
DAC Value (in EEPROM): 2155
DG>

This command can be password protected.

DUMP a b
This command displays a section of memory. a = start address, b = byte count. The form of the
command is:
DG> dump 100 32<cr>
000064: 7A 00 11 42 7A 00 11 42 7A 00 11 42 81 CA 11 42 - z..Bz..Bz..B...B
000074: 7A 00 11 42 7A 00 11 42 7A 00 11 42 7A 00 11 42 - z..Bz..Bz..Bz..B

This command can be password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 145

DVM
This command displays the channel signals. Same as AQ DVM. Only available if acquisition is
ON.
Not password protected.

EEPROM
Starts the EEPROM Diagnostics. Each device is an EEPROM on a circuit board installed in the
instrument. If a device (board) is not installed the response will be "ERROR READING
DEVICE". As of July 1995 the following have been defined:
Device 1, [SCLK1, 128 bytes], Front Panel I/O Board, 109405
Device 2, [SCLK1, 256 bytes], Internal Sensor Deck*
Device 3, [SCLK1, 256 bytes], External 3-channel Input Board, 109490*
Device 4, [SCLK1, 256 bytes], ADC/DSP Board, 109425, 109440-1, 109440-2
Device 7, [SCLK1, 128 bytes], PCMCIA Board, 109415
Device 9, [SCLK2, 8192 bytes], MCU Board, 109420, 109445
Device 10, [SCLK2, 256 bytes], --Device 11, [SCLK2, 256 bytes], --Device 12, [SCLK2, 256 bytes], --Device 18, [SCLK3, 256 bytes], Network Option Board, 110865
Device 19, [SCLK3, 128 bytes], Power Supply Board, 109410
* or Altus Simple calibrator Board, 109555
See the Appendix to see the display of the 'D' display. To start this diagnostic, type:
DG> eep<cr>
Enter ? for help
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]:
Commands:
> Increment device number
< Decrement device number
D Display EEPROM contents
F Dump FBA data
H View EEPROM Header
Q Quit
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]:
Device: 1
Version: 1
Size: 128
Build Date: 434
Serial #: 0232
Assembly #: 109405
Dash #: 0
Revision: D
, P/L Rev.: 6
,
Test Date: 02/13/1995
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]:
[Device #2 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]:
Device: 2
Version: 1
Size: 256
Build Date: 444
Serial #: 0229
Assembly #: 109435
Dash #: 0
Revision: A
, P/L Rev.: 3
,

Page 146

Deviations: 0
>
h

Deviations: 0

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Test Date: 02/14/1995

[Device #2 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #3 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: h
Device: 3
Version: 1
Size: 256
Build Date: 464
Serial #: 0190
Assembly #: 109490
Dash #: 0
Revision: A
, P/L Rev.: 5
, Deviations:
Test Date: 02/14/1995
[Device #3 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #4 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: h
Device: 4
Version: 1
Size: 256
Build Date: 504
Serial #: 0181
Assembly #: 109440
Dash #: 2
Revision: A
, P/L Rev.: 4
, Deviations:
Test Date: 01/21/1995
[Device #4 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #7 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: h
Device: 7
Version: 1
Size: 128
Build Date: 404
Serial #: 0294
Assembly #: 109415
Dash #: 0
Revision: B
, P/L Rev.: 7
, Deviations:
Test Date: 02/13/1995
[Device #7 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: >
[Device #9 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: h
Device: 9
Version: 1
Size: 256
Build Date: 444
Serial #: 0314
Assembly #: 109420
Dash #: 0
Revision: B
, P/L Rev.: 10 , Deviations:
Test Date: 01/18/1995
[Device #9 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #10 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: h
ERROR READING DEVICE
[Device #10 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #11 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: h
ERROR READING DEVICE
[Device #11 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #12 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: h
ERROR READING DEVICE
[Device #12 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #19 (SCLK3, 128 bytes)]: h
Device: 19
Version: 1
Size: 128
Build Date: 354
Serial #: 0194
Assembly #: 109410
Dash #: 0

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 147

Revision: B
, P/L Rev.: 6
, Deviations: 0
Test Date: 02/06/1995
[Device #19 (SCLK3, 128 bytes)]: >

Sensor Information for an Internal FBA deck:

Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: f<cr>
*** CHANNEL 1 ***
S/N 37498, Fullscale code: 2
Sensitivity: 1.2500, Damping: 0.6400, Nat. Freq: 52.30
Linearity: 0.0000, Hysterisis: 0.0000, X-axis: 0.0100
Misc: 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
SOT: 8080 3651 1051 4991 0 0
Resp.: 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
*** CHANNEL 2 ***
S/N 37499, Fullscale code: 2
Sensitivity: 1.2500, Damping: 0.6600, Nat. Freq: 52.90
Linearity: 0.0000, Hysterisis: 0.0000, X-axis: 0.0100
Misc: 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
SOT: 8100 3651 1051 5361 0 0
Resp.: 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
*** CHANNEL 3 ***
S/N 37500, Fullscale code: 2
Sensitivity: 1.2500, Damping: 0.6600, Nat. Freq: 53.30
Linearity: 0.0000, Hysterisis: 0.0000, X-axis: 0.0100
Misc: 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
SOT: 8100 2431 1101 6341 0 0
Resp.: 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]:
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: q

Sensor Information for an Internal EpiSensor deck:

DG> eep<cr>
Enter ? for help
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: f<cr>
*** CHANNEL 1 ***
S/N 859 R1 = 140000, R5 = 0, R15 = 1946, R16 = 90797, Range: 2, Gain:
Sensitivity: 1 = 0.62620, 2 = 1.25170, 3 = 2.50200, 4 = 5.00350, 5 =
Cal coil: 0.05670V, Bandwidth: 212.00000, Phase: -56.60000
Pole 1: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000. Pole 2: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000.
Pole 3: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000. Pole 4: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000.
Pole 5: R = 0.00000, I = 212.00000.
*** CHANNEL 2 ***
S/N 890 R1 = 140000, R5 = 0, R15 = 2063, R16 = 61954, Range: 2, Gain:
Sensitivity: 1 = 0.62550, 2 = 1.25010, 3 = 2.49900, 4 = 4.99850, 5 =
Cal coil: 0.05430V, Bandwidth: 214.00000, Phase: -55.90000
Pole 1: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000. Pole 2: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000.
Pole 3: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000. Pole 4: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000.
Pole 5: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000.
*** CHANNEL 3 ***
S/N 932 R1 = 140000, R5 = 0, R15 = 2158, R16 = 40045, Range: 2, Gain:
Sensitivity: 1 = 0.62630, 2 = 1.25190, 3 = 2.50170, 4 = 5.00430, 5 =
Cal coil: 0.05550V, Bandwidth: 210.00000, Phase: -56.60000
Pole 1: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000. Pole 2: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000.
Pole 3: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000. Pole 4: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000.
Pole 5: R = 0.00000, I = 0.00000.
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: q

Page 148

Document 302219 Rev P

1
9.99620

1
9.98990

1
10.00040

March, 2006

The Mt. Whitney response:

DG> eep<cr>
Enter ? for help
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: ?
Commands:
> Increment device number
< Decrement device number
D Display EEPROM contents
F Dump FBA data
H View EEPROM Header
Q Quit
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: h
Device: 1
Version: 1
Size: 128
Build Date: 324
Serial #: 0180
Assembly #: 109405
Dash #: 0
Revision: C
, P/L Rev.:
, Deviations: 0
Test Date: 12/20/1994
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: >
[Device #2 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: h
ERROR READING DEVICE
[Device #2 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #3 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: h
ERROR READING DEVICE
[Device #3 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #4 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: h
Device: 4
Version: 0
Size: 128
Build Date: 000
Serial #: 0000
Assembly #: 0
Dash #: 0
Revision:
, P/L Rev.:
, Deviations: 0
Test Date: 01/01/1980
[Device #4 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #7 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: h
Device: 7
Version: 1
Size: 128
Build Date: 414
Serial #: 0282
Assembly #: 109415
Dash #: 0
Revision: B
, P/L Rev.: 7
, Deviations: 0
Test Date: 11/17/1994
[Device #7 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: .
[Device #9 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #10 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: h
ERROR READING DEVICE
[Device #10 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #11 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: h
ERROR READING DEVICE
[Device #11 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #12 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: h
ERROR READING DEVICE
[Device #12 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #19 (SCLK3, 128 bytes)]: h
Device: 19

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 149

Version: 1
Size: 128
Build Date: 364
Serial #: 0180
Assembly #: 109410
Dash #: 0
Revision: B
, P/L Rev.: 6
, Deviations: 0
Test Date: 09/29/1994
[Device #19 (SCLK3, 128 bytes)]: >
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: q

The EEPROM command can be password protected.

EPISENSOR GAIN
Allows user to change the gain parameter in the EpiSensor internal deck EEPROM to
accommodate possible jumper changes. By default when an EpiSensor deck leaves the factory,
the jumper settings and the EEPROM values are set to the same values.
Should it become necessary to change the jumper settings, the values indicated in the EEPROM
will no longer match the jumper settings. This command is provided to allow modification of the
EEPROM values to once again match the jumper settings.
To read the current values, type the EPISENSOR GAIN command with no parameters:
DG> epi gain<cr>
Syntax: EPISENSOR GAIN = channel, value
Episensor gain: ch 1 = 1, ch 2 = 1, ch 3 = 1.

To set the EpiSensor gain for channel 1 to 2, type at the DG> prompt:
DG> epi gain 1 2<cr>

The EpiSensor gain can be set to 1, 2, 4, or 8.

For a discussion of the sensor type and EpiSensor sensitivity determination, see the section titled
Sensor Type and Sensitivity Determination.
This command can be password protected.

EPISENSOR RANGE
Allows user to change the range parameter in the EpiSensor internal deck EEPROM to
accommodate possible jumper changes. By default when an EpiSensor deck leaves the factory,
the jumper settings and the EEPROM values are set to the same values.
Should it become necessary to change the jumper settings, the values indicated in the EEPROM
will no longer match the jumper settings. This command is provided to allow modification of the
EEPROM values to once again match the jumper settings.
To read the current values, type the EPISENSOR RANGE command with no parameters:
DG> epi range<cr>
Syntax: EPISENSOR RANGE = channel, value
Episensor range: Ch1 = 2, ch 2 = 2, ch 3 = 2.

Page 150

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

To set the EpiSensor range for channel 1 to 4, type at the DG> prompt:
DG> epi range 1 4<cr>

The EpiSensor range can be set to 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.

For a discussion of the sensor type and EpiSensor sensitivity determination, see the section titled
Sensor Type and Sensitivity Determination.
This command can be password protected.

FORMAT d
This command will format and check each cluster of the specified PCMCIA hard drive or
SanDisk. d = drive specification, A: or B:. If a drive is not specified, A: is assumed. This
command may take a very long time to complete. For example a 5 Mbyte SanDisk takes 17
minutes to format. A counter is decremented as each cluster is completed. The 5 Mbyte SanDisk
started at Cluster 1272. The ENTER key, <cr>, will abort the format. This or the main command
'FORMAT' should then be run before any PCMCIA hard disk or SanDisk is used to record data.
The form of the command is:
DG> format<cr>

The K2 response:
This command will format and check each disk sector
and may take a very long time to complete.
Do you wish to format drive A:? Y<cr>
Caution: All data on this disk is about to be destroyed.
Continue? Y<cr>
Cluster 1272
[down counts to 2, then it is finished]

This command can be password protected.

GPIN
This command reads the 16 general purpose I/O port pins several times per second and displays
them on the screen. Mt. Whitney only. Added 7/96 (Application firmware 2.00) To stop the
command, type any key.
The form of the command is:
DG> gpi<cr>

The instrument response is:

GPIN: 1111 1111 1011 1111
Press any key to exit

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 151

GPOUT h
This command saves the current state of the 16pins of the general purpose I/O port and sets the
port pins to the hexadecimal value, h. When the command is canceled by typing any key, the
saved values are restored. After this test it is recommended that the instrument be RESET with
the SYS RES command. Mt. Whitney only.
To test the output pattern '0000 0000 0010 0010' enter:
DG> GPO $22<cr>

The instrument response is:

GPOUT = $0022
Press any key to exit

GPS AVERAGING n
This command will enable or disable GPS averaging, which averages multiple GPS position
samples in order to improve the overall position fix for the recorder. The command uses 0 to
disable and 1 to enable GPS averaging.
The GPS DEFAULT, GPS PARAMETER and GPS RESTART commands have been added to
support this feature. The GPS STATUS command will display the averaged position if the feature
is active.
If GPS is installed and the LOCATION values in the header (latitude, longitude, and elevation)
are all 0, GPS averaging will be automatically selected. If the GPS PARAMETERS are not set,
then the GPS DEFAULT values will be used. When GPS averaging is active, the LOCATION
values in the instrument header will be automatically updated.
These values will not be permanently stored in the instrument header unless the EDIT command
is used to store them.
To check the current value of the GPS average and mode, enter:
DG> gps ave<cr>
Syntax: Syntax: GPS AVERAGE n.
GPS averaging on

0 to disable, 1 to enable.

To change the state of GPS averaging, enter:

DG> gps ave 0<cr>
GPS averaging off

This command can be password protected.

Page 152

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

GPS CLEAR n
This function clears GPS counters, primarily as an aid in testing. Without using this command,
these parameters are only cleared at reboot.
Use 1 to clear GPS update count, 2 to clear GPS failed locks count. A value of 3 will clear both
counters.
These counters are reflected in the GPS DIA and GPS STATUS displays as well as in the event
header.
To clear all of the GPS counters, enter:
DG> gps cle 3<cr>
No. of RTC Updates: 0
No. of Failed Locks: 0

This command can be password protected.

GPS DEFAULT
This command selects the default values for the GPS PARAMETERS. These values are:
GPS Dynamics mode = 1
Elevation Angle = 4.0
Signal level mask = 2.2
PDOP Mask = 12.0
PDOP Switch = 5.0
To default the GPS parameters, enter:
DG> gps def<cr>

This command can be password protected.

GPS DIAGNOSTICS
This command enters a diagnostic mode for an installed internal GPS. Several different
commands plus QUIT are available.
H = health. This displays the GPS's own status report.
S = signal levels. This displays the signal to noise ratio for each satellite.
T = Time. This displays the time from the GPS, if ready.
Z = GPS status. Same as GPS STATUS. From 'Power is ...' to 'GPS antenna...'
C = Clock sync. Same as GPS SYNC. This synchronizes the instrument clocks to
the GPS signal.
F = GPS firmware version. Returns version numbers & dates of the GPS
module's navigation and signal firmware.
Q = Quit.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 153

DG> gps dia<cr>

Power is ON (Free Field Mode)
No. of RTC Updates: 1
No. of Failed Locks: 0
Last GPS Lock At : May 11, 2000 11:30:40.000
Last RTC Update At: May 11, 2000 11:29:12.000 (Drift: < 1 ms)
Last Powered Up At: May 11, 2000 11:34:33.000
Last GPS Lock At : May 11, 2000 11:29:14.000
Last RTC Update At: Jan 01, 1980 00:00:00.000 (Drift: < 1 ms)
Last Powered Up At: May 11, 2000 11:28:08.000
Last Position:
34.139999N -118.099998E 208m
Average Position:
34.148647N -118.102386E 208m 9 samples
Will Power Down At: May 11, 2000 12:04:33.000
Next Power Up Time: May 11, 2000 12:04:33.000
DAC Value (Current): 2396
DAC Value (Dithered): 2395.2
DAC Value (in EEPROM): 2373
GPS antenna: OK
Commands:
H=health; S=signal levels; T=time, Z=GPS Status,
C=Clock Sync, F=GPS F/W Version, Q to quit
T
[Sending 21]
[41]No time or time is not accurate yet.
[46]
Health of GPS: Don't have GPS time yet
[4B]Almanac Status: 0[01][4B]Almanac Status: 0
DRIFT:65535, DAC:2154 0 0
H
[Sending 26]
[46]
Health of GPS: Doing position fixes
[4B]
Almanac Status: 0
GPS Module ID: 27
DRIFT:65535, DAC:2155 0 0
[Sending 26]
[41]
Time in packet: Jun 28, 1995

16:36:11.406

DRIFT:481+, DAC:2155 0 0
-1
[41][41][46]
Health of GPS: Doing position fixes
[4B]Almanac Status: 0[43]
DRIFT:480+, DAC:2154 0 0
-1
F
[Sending 1F]
<1F>[45]
GPS F/W (NAV): v4.6 05/18/94, (SIG): v1.17 12/21/93

Page 154

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

C
[41][41]
Time in packet: Jun 28, 1995 16:36:34.125
Synchronizing clocks. Please wait...
GPS 1PPS: Jun 28, 1995 16:36:41.000 (36490)
HEARTBEAT: Jun 28, 1995 16:36:41.000 (36501)
1 KHZ:
Jun 28, 1995 16:36:41.001 (40185)
1 HZ:
Jun 28, 1995 16:36:41.000 (36500)
RTC:
Jun 28, 1995 16:36:41.000
Clock source=1 HZ
DAC Value (Current): 2145
DAC Value (in EEPROM): 2155
S
[Sending 27]
[47]SNR for satellites: 6
SV 1
0.00
SV 2
17.67
SV 3
0.00
SV 4
11.40
SV 5
0.00
SV 7
12.30

The GPS Module ID is a code for the type of GPS module installed:
Module ID

GPS Module

27
90 or 94

SV6 Series
ACE Series

The GPS DIA command can be password protected.

GPS ON
This command turns power ON to the GPS board.

GPS OFF
This command turn power OFF to the GPS board.
The form of the commands are:
DG> gps on<cr>
DG> gps off<cr>

If a GPS board is not installed, the response is:

GPS BOARD NOT PRESENT.

These commands can be password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 155

GPS PARAMETERS mod ang sig msk sw

This command allows the user to select the parameters that the GPS receiver uses to control the
satellites used for position computation.
Syntax: GPS PARAMETERS = dynamics, elevation, signal, PDOP mask, PDOP switch
The dynamics mode tells the receiver if it is movable or fixed. The default is 1. The range is
1 to 4 where 1 is ground location, 2 is sea location, 3 is air location and 4 is fixed location.
The use of mode 4 allows the receiver to provide accurate time with only 1 satellite after a
good position has been computed.
NOTE: STATIC mode is not supported in systems with ACE Series GPS modules and
firmware versions before v3.00. Using GPS PARAMETERS to set the mode to STATIC
does not cause a problem because the system automatically determines the GPS module
type installed. If it is an ACE, the dynamics code is forced to LAND. If it is an SV6
CM2/CM3, the user-selected setting is used.
STATIC mode is fully supported in firmware versions v3.00 and later.
The elevation angle is the number of degrees above the horizon that a satellite must be before
it can be used to compute a position.
The signal level mask is the minimum signal to noise ratio for a satellite to be used to
compute a position.
The PDOP mask sets the maximum PDOP with which position fixes are computed.
The PDOP switch sets the threshold for automatic 3-D/2-D mode. If 4 or more satellites are
available and the resulting PDOP is not greater than the PDOP mask, then 3-dimensional
fixes are used.
GPS averaging will only use 3-dimensional position fixes to determine the average position.
To display the current GPS parameters, enter:
DG> gps par<cr>
Syntax: GPS PARAMETERS = dynamics, elevation, signal, PDOP mask, PDOP switch
GPS Dynamics mode = 1, Elevation Angle = 4.0, Signal level mask = 2.2,
PDOP Mask = 12.0, PDOP Switch = 5.0

To change the GPS parameters, enter:

DG> gps par 4 5 2.3 11 4.5<cr>
GPS Dynamics mode = 4, Elevation Angle = 5.0, Signal level mask = 2.3,
PDOP Mask = 11.0, PDOP Switch = 4.5

This command can be password protected.

Page 156

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

GPS PULSE_COUNT n
This command allows the user to specify the number of pulses generated by the GPS module on
power up of the GPS module.
The pulse sequence generated by the GPS module is used by the firmware to recognize the
presence or absence of the GPS module in the system.
The range of accepted values is 0 to 5, with 0 indicating that no pulses are required and that the
presence of a GPS module is assumed. The default value is 2.
To display the current GPS pulse count, enter:
DG> gps pul<cr>
Syntax: GPS PULSE_COUNT count
GPS PULSE COUNT = 2

To change the GPS pulse count, enter:

DG> gps pul 4<cr>

This command can be password protected.

GPS RESTART
This command restarts the GPS averaging accumulators so that averaged location positions will
be more affected by the currently reported values.
This command would be useful if a recorder was moved with the power on, and it desired to
update the position to the new current position. Without clearing the accumulators, it might take
several hours for the averaged position to adjust.
The GPS accumulators are cleared on power up.
To restart the GPS accumulators, enter:
DG> gps restart<cr>

This command can be password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 157

GPS STATUS
This command displays the current status of the installed GPS. The form of the command is:
DG> gps sta<cr>
Power is OFF (Free Field Mode)
No. of RTC Updates: 0
No. of Failed Locks: 0
Last GPS Lock At : May 11, 2000 11:08:04.000
Last Powered Up At: May 11, 2000 11:08:01.000
Last GPS Lock At : May 11, 2000 11:05:34.000
Last Powered Up At: May 11, 2000 10:38:01.000
Last Position:
34.148659N -118.102356E 202m
Average Position:
34.148647N -118.102394E 209m 7 samples
Next Power Up Time: May 11, 2000 11:38:01.000
DAC Value (Current): 2396
DAC Value (Dithered): 2395.6
DAC Value (in EEPROM): 2373
GPS antenna: OK

'GPS antenna:' reports the status of the electrical connection between the GPS
antenna and GPS module. The message will indicate either:
GPS antenna: OK
- or GPS antenna: open/shorted
- or GPS antenna: status unavailable
The third condition can occur when the GPS module is installed but always off,
or if the module was detected during boot but the instrument is not receiving
packets from it.
While the GPS module is powered off, antenna status reports the last status
received while the module was on. Antenna status changes that occur while the
module is off will not be reported until the next time the module is powered on.
NOTE: All instruments with SV6 modules will always report anntenna status "unavailable"
as the SV6 does not report antenna status.
Not password protected.

Page 158

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

GPS SYNC
This command synchronizes the system's clocks. It is also available as the 'C' command under
GPS DIAGNOSTICS. The form of the command is:
DG> gps sync<cr>
Synchronizing clocks. Please wait...
GPS 1PPS: Jun 28, 1995 16:36:41.000
HEARTBEAT: Jun 28, 1995 16:36:41.000
1 KHZ:
Jun 28, 1995 16:36:41.001
1 HZ:
Jun 28, 1995 16:36:41.000
RTC:
Jun 28, 1995 16:36:41.000
Clock source=1 HZ
DAC Value (Current): 2145
DAC Value (in EEPROM): 2155

(36490)
(36501)
(40185)
(36500)

This command can be password protected.

HELP
This command displays the Diagnostic commands.
DG> hel<cr>
Commands:
ABORT
BATTERY
DOS
EEPROM
GPS
LED
PCMCIA
Q
STACK

ADC
CALIBRATE
DUMP
EPISENSOR
HELP
MEMTEST
PLL
QUIT
TIME

DG> epi<cr>
Commands:
GAIN

RANGE

DG> gps<cr>
Commands:
AVERAGING
OFF
RESTART

DEFAULT
ON
STATUS

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

ALARM
DAC
DVM
FORMAT
INIT
PASSWORD
PW
RAM
TRIGGER_OUT

DIAGNOSTICS
PARAMETERS
SYNC

Page 159

INIT n
This command can be used to restore an unreadable disk drive. n = drive letter, A: or B:. If the
instrument cannot read or format a PCMCIA hard disk or SanDisk, its partition table may have
been corrupted by another program. After this command is used on a drive, one of the 'FORMAT
d' commands MUST BE USED to reformat the PCMCIA disk drive or SanDisk. This command
writes the pattern '00h' to the partition sector of the disk drive. It is intended as a last resort
disaster recovery tool AND WILL DESTROY ALL DATA ON THE DISK DRIVE. This
command takes less than one minute to complete.
The form of this command in a K2:
DG> init<cr>
This command will fill your disk drive with the byte pattern 00h.
It will completely destroy any partition information that the drive contains.
You will have to issue one of the FORMAT commands after issuing this command.
Do you wish to initialize drive A:?y
CAUTION: All data on this disk is about to be destroyed.
Enter 'destroy' to continue or <CR> to exit:
DG> quit<cr>
* for<cr>
This command will format and check each disk sector
and may take a very long time to complete.
Do you wish to format drive A:? y
CAUTION: All data on this disk is about to be destroyed.
Enter 'destroy' to continue or <CR> to exit:

This command can be password protected.

LED DEBUG
This command displays LED actions as text output. The form of the command is:
DG> led deb<cr>

A typical K2 response:
DG> led deb<cr>
Press any key to quit
STATUS: AQ
(LED: 90h)
// bits 7 & 4 ON
BATTERY VOLTS: -13.50(CHARGING) (LED: 45h) // bits 6, 3 & 0 ON
MEMORY PERCENT FULL: 1 (LED: 30h) // bits 5 & 4 ON
STATUS: AQ
(LED: 90h)
BATTERY VOLTS: -13.50(CHARGING) (LED: 45h)
MEMORY PERCENT FULL: 1 (LED: 30h)
STATUS: AQ
(LED: 90h)
BATTERY VOLTS: -13.50(CHARGING) (LED: 45h)
MEMORY PERCENT FULL: 1 (LED: 30h)
STATUS: AQ
(LED: 90h)
BATTERY VOLTS: -13.50(CHARGING) (LED: 45h)

Page 160

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Bit
STATUS
BATTERY
MEMORY

128 7
64 6
32 5

4
16
ACQ
11.5
1/4

3
8
TRIG
12.5
1/2

2
4
EVENT
13.5
3/4

1
2
CDERR
14.5
FULL

0
1
FAULT
CHRG
BUSY

This command can be password protected.

LED SET n
This command turns on the specified LED.
n = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128
This command is not supported in the Etna.

LED START

This command starts/restarts the LED display.

To test if an LED has burned out, enter the following & observe the LED display:
DG> led sto<cr>
DG> led set 1<cr>
LED set to: 1
DG> led set 2<cr>
LED set to: 2
DG> led set 4<cr>
LED set to: 4
DG> led set 8<cr>
LED set to: 8
DG> led set 16<cr>
LED set to: 16
DG> led set 32<cr>
LED set to: 32
DG> led set 64<cr>
LED set to: 64
DG> led set 128<cr>
LED set to: 128
DG> led sta<cr>

These commands can be password protected.

This command is not supported in the Etna.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 161

LED STOP
This command stops the LED display.
This command is not supported in the Etna.

MEMTEST
This command performs a memory test. It calculates a CHECKSUM for Flash memory sections
0-15. For Kinemetrics internal testing only. For reference the form of the command is:
DG> mem<cr>
Memory Task started.
Press any key to stop.
Flash Sector 0 checksum = 4FA7
Flash Sector 1 checksum = 0C8B
Flash Sector 2 checksum = 164D
Flash Sector 3 checksum = 7070
Flash Sector 4 checksum = F188
Flash Sector 5 checksum = DF06
Flash Sector 6 checksum = 3884
Flash Sector 7 checksum = 1277
Flash Sector 8 checksum = A292
Flash Sector 9 checksum = CD76
Flash Sector 10 checksum = C000
Flash Sector 11 checksum = 6C6B
Flash Sector 12 checksum = 3CEB
Flash Sector 13 checksum = C000
Flash Sector 14 checksum = FCCD
Flash Sector 15 checksum = C000

This command can be password protected.

PASSWORD w, PW w
Same as PASSWORD and PW at the main, '*', prompt.

PLL
This command tests for lock of the Phase Lock Loop (PLL). The lock bit is read 100 times. If all
100 are lock, the test reports 'LOCK. If not the test reports 'UNLOCK'. If the test result is
'UNLOCK' corrective measures should be taken immediately as there is danger of data loss.
Passing the test with 'LOCK' only indicates that at this time the PLL is locked. There still may be
a problem with the PLL or an oscillator that requires test instruments to detect.

QUIT, Q
Return to the main command prompt, '*'.

RAM
This command displays the amount of available RAM in bytes and the count of the
number of blocks. The form of the command is:
DG> ram<cr>
Free RAM: 27204 bytes in 1 block(s). Largest block: 27204.
18 blocks allocated.

This command can be password protected.

Page 162

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

STACK INIT
Initializes the stack for each task so the STACK TEST command reports the correct information.
This command generates no messages or other visible information.
This command can be password protected.

STACK TEST
Reports information on each task's stack usage. For each task the following information is
displayed:
- Task number
- Bytes of stack currently free
- Minimum unused stack free since last INIT
The form of the command and results are:
DG> STACK INIT
DG> STACK TEST
Task 1 stack: 685 free, 685 min free
Task 2 stack: 623 free, 622 min free
Task 3 stack: 697 free, 638 min free
Task 4 stack: 857 free, 694 min free
Task 5 stack: 667 free, 667 min free
Task 6 stack: 595 free, 478 min free
Task 7 stack: 749 free, 728 min free
Task 8 stack: 1713 free, 1568 min free
Task 9 stack: 547 free, 544 min free
Task 10 stack: 785 free, 772 min free

This command can be password protected.

TIME
This command displays all of the internal clocks: GPS 1PPS, Heartbeat, 1KHz, 1Hz and RTC.
The form of the command is:
DG> time<cr>
GPS 1PPS: Jan 01, 1980 00:00:01.000 (GPS is OFF)(14533)
HEARTBEAT: Jun 28, 1995 11:15:17.000 (13784)
1 KHZ:
Jun 28, 1995 11:15:17.000 (13781)
1 HZ:
Jun 28, 1995 11:15:17.000 (13783)
RTC:
Jun 28, 1995 11:15:17.000
Clock source=1 HZ
DAC Value (Current): 2516
DAC Value (in EEPROM): 2516
Real time display of 1 Khz time acquired on 1 Hz interrupt: (Press any key to
quit)
Jun 28, 1995 11:15:18.000

This command can be password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 163

TRIGGER_OUT time code

This diagnostic command will redirect the trigger output to the data stream for recording in an
event file. The file recorded is flagged as a trigger file and so reported in QuickLook.
time = the number of minutes that the trigger output will be redirected to the recording
stream. 1-60 minutes, 0 = Stop redirection of trigger data to recording path.
The following codes apply:
1

Redirect the first channel of the installed DSP board(s), channel 1 (7, 13) Trigger
parameters to the data stream in the following pattern:
recorded channel
1
2
3

4
5
6

Data recorded for the Selected Channel

Acceleration data
Trigger Filtered data
State of the Filter Algorithm,
Initial states:
0.0xxV = state 0, Reset
0.1xxV = state 1, First STA time
0.2xxV = state 2, Building STA
0.3xxV = state 3, First LTA time
0.4xxV = state 4, Building LTA
Working states:
0.5xxV = state 5, Background mode, looking for
trigger
0.6xxV = state 6, Triggered, looking for detrigger
0.7xxV = state 7, Detrigger, looking for retrigger
State of Trigger Bit , 0.0V = OFF, 0.3V = ON
STA
LTA

If unit has an Old DSP Board, 109425-00, with only 4 channels, the redirection pattern is:
recorded channel
1
2
3
4

2
3
4
5
6
7

Page 164

Data recorded for the Selected Channel

Acceleration data
Trigger Filtered data, signal trace in QuickLook
will be BOLD when the channel is triggered
STA
LTA

Redirect the second channel of the installed DSP board(s), channel 2 (8, 14)
Redirect the third channel of the installed DSP board(s), channel 3 (9, 15)
Redirect the fourth channel of the installed DSP board(s), channel 4 (10, 16)
Redirect the fifth channel of the installed DSP board(s), channel 5 (11, 17)
Redirect the sixth channel of the installed DSP board(s), channel 6 (12, 18)
Redirect each channel's trigger filtered output to the record data stream.

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Syntax:
DG> tri<cr>
Syntax: TRIGGER_OUT timeout type
Timeout in minutes (1-60) 0 restores Data Out.
Type (1-7) 1-6 selects indicated channel, 7 selects all channels.
Selections affect all DSP boards in multiple board systems.
Trigger File Output Timed Out
Seismic Data Directed to File
DG> tri 2 1<cr>
2.00 Minutes to Trigger Output Time Out
Trigger Data Directed to File
DG> tri 0<cr>
Trigger File Output Timed Out
Seismic Data Directed to File

This command can be password protected.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 165

6. APPENDICES

APPENDIX A - Combined K2 and Mt. Whitney Header Structure Expanded

The following is the structure of an Altus header:
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*

kwhead.map */
ver 1.10 12 channel K2 Header */
ver 1.20 18 channel Mt. Whitney Header */
ver 1.30 12 channel K2 Header */
ver 1.40 12 channel K2 Header
with seismological & Serial Data Stream Parameters */
/* ver 1.50 18 channel Mt. Whitney Header
with seismological and Serial Data Stream Parameters*/
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*

7/96 define unused records */

unsigned long stream_ro_parms.triggerbitmap */
char
misc_rw_parms.siteID[17] */
char
modem_rw_parms.cellShare -- FUTURE USE in K2*/
char
modem_rw_parms.cellOnTime, (Duration) */
char
modem_rw_parms.cellWarmupTime */
short modem_rw_parms.cellStartTime[5] */
char
modem_rw_parms.callOutMsg[46] */

/* 4/97

1.40 and 1.50 headers:

redefine unused records */

/* in each of the channel CHANNEL_RW_PARAMETERS,

after 'gain' change definition
from:
float resp1;
float resp2;

or

char bytepad1[8];

to:
unsigned char triggerType;
/* type of trigger calculation */
/* 0 = threshold, default */
/* 1 = sta/lta */
unsigned char iirTrigFilter;
/* type of bandpass filter for */
/* for trigger, default CSM */
/* 0 = iira
IIR bandpass 1.2 to
20Hz @ 200sps */
/* 1 = CSM, classic strong motion */
/*
0.1 to 12.5 Hz @ 200sps */
/* 2 = iirc
IIR bandpass 2.0 to
40Hz at 200sps */
unsigned char StaSeconds;
/* sta seconds times 10 */
/* 17 valid sta values,
code used internally in K2 */

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 167

/* 0h
/* 1
/* 2
/* 3
/* 4
/* 5
/* 6
/* 7
/* 8
/* 9
/* a
/* b
/* c
/* d
/* e
/* f
/* 10

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

0.1 store as
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.5
3.0
5.0
10.0

1 */
2 */
3 */
4 */
5 */
6 */
8 */
10, default */
12 */
14 */
16 */
18 */
20 */
25 */
30 */
50 */
100 */

unsigned char LtaSeconds;

/* lta seconds */
/* 8 valid lta values,
code used internally in K2 */
/* 0h = 20 store as
20 */
/* 1 = 30
30 */
/* 2 = 40
40 */
/* 3 = 50
50 */
/* 4 = 60
60, default */
/* 5 = 80
80 */
/* 6 = 100
100 */
/* 7 = 120
120 */
unsigned short StaLtaRatio;
/* sta/lta trigger ratio times 10 */
/* 12 valid ratio values,
code used internally in K2 */
/* 0h =
1.5 store as 15 */
/* 1 =
2
20 */
/* 2 =
3
30 */
/* 3 =
4
40, default */
/* 4 =
6
60 */
/* 5 =
8
80 */
/* 6 = 10
100 */
/* 7 = 15
150 */
/* 8 = 20
200 */
/* 9 = 30
300 */
/* a = 40
400 */
/* b = 60
500 */
/* c = 100
1000 */
unsigned char StaLtaPrecent;
/* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
/* if detrigger percent X trigger ratio is
less than 1.2, detrigger ratio
will be 1.2 */
/* 6 valid detrigger percent values,
code used internally */
/* 0h =
10% store as 10 */
/* 1 =
15
15 */
/* 2 =
20
20 */
/* 3 =
40
40 */
/* 4 =
60
60 */
/* 5 = 100
100 */

Page 168

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

char bytepad1[1];

/* reserved */

*/
/* 4/97

1.40 and 1.50 headers: redefine unused records */

/* in STREAM_RW_PARAMETRES
from:
short
long

change

wordpad[4]
dwordpad[4]

to:
char bytepada;
unsigned char FilterType;
unsigned char DataFmt;
char Reserved;
short Timeout;

/* Serial Data
/*
mode 1 /*
2 /*
/*
3 -

unsigned short TxBlkSize;

unsigned short BufferSize;

unsigned short SampleRate;

unsigned long TxChanMap;

long dwordpad[2];

/* FirB: 0 regular, 1 causal */

/* Serial Data Stream: 0=uncompressed
1=compressed */

/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*

Stream Mode:
*/
0
default
*/
6..32767
*/
send 'continue cmd' */
-1 cmd for each block */

Serial Data Stream (unused)

*/
Serial Data Stream:
*/
size of #SSTRBUF.BIN file in disk */
number of 16,384 byte blocks */
default= 64 - 1Meg */
Serial Data Stream sample rate */
Serial Data Stream:
*/
select up to 6 channels */

/* for expansion */

*/

/*************************************************/
/* Type Definitions:
char: 1 byte integer
short: 2 byte integer
float: 4 byte floating point (IEEE format)
long: 4 byte integer
All structures are 16-bit aligned
*/
// for K2
#define MAX_CHANNELS 12
// for Mt. Whitney
#define MAX_CHANNELS 18
/* This is what the K2 header looks like */
struct K2_HEADER {
struct RO_PARMS roParms;
/* Group read only parms into one structure */
#define FILE_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 8
/* size of file descriptor */

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 169

struct RO_PARMS {
K2&MW
000
003
004
006

008
009
00a

00b

0-2
3
4-5
6-7

/* first 8 bytes is a common file descriptor */

char id[3]; /* = 'KMI' to denote a Kinemetrics file */
unsigned char instrumentCode; /* = '9' for K2 */
unsigned short headerVersion; /* header version * 100 */
unsigned short headerBytes; /* size of header following
(includes RW_PARMS) */

/* actual header follows */

struct MISC_RO_PARMS {
8
unsigned char a2dBits; /* A/D bits per sample; = A2DBITS */
9
unsigned char sampleBytes; /* bytes per sample; = 3 */
a
unsigned char restartSource; /* code of restart source:
// 0 = unknown
// 1 = power switch;
// 2 = user command,
// 3 = software watchdog,
// 4 = DSP failure,
// 5 = battery failure,
// 6 = memory error */
b-d
char bytepad[3]; /* for expansion */

00e

e-f

010
012
014
016

10-11
12-13
14-15
16-17

018

18-19

01a

/* System Status */
1a-1b short batteryVoltage; /* voltage * 10; negative value
indicates charging */

01c

01e
20
22
028

038

039

Page 170

unsigned short installedChan; /* number of channels in system

= (# dsp brds) * (chan per brd) */
unsigned short maxChannels; /* physical number of channels */
unsigned short sysBlkVersion; /* sys block version * 100 */
unsigned short bootBlkVersion; /* boot block version * 100 */
unsigned short appBlkVersion;
/* application block version * 100 */
unsigned short dspBlkVersion; /* DSP version * 100 */

1c-1d unsigned short crc; /* 16-bit CRC of entire file,

with this word set to 0xffff */
/* NOTE: this parameter is not used at the moment.
For integrity checking, the header and each frame
are preceded by a structure tag which contains a
checksum */
1e-1f unsigned short flags; /* bit 0 = 1 if DSP system error */
20-21 short temperature; /* degrees C x 10 */
22-27 short wordpad[3]; /* for expansion */
28-37 long dwordpad[4]; /* for expansion */
};

struct TIMING_RO_PARMS {
38
unsigned char clockSource;
/* 0 = RTC from cold start
1 = keyboard
2 = Sync w/ ext. ref. pulse
3 = Internal GPS */
39

unsigned char gpsStatus;

/* Bit 0=1 if currently checking for
presence of GPS board
Bit 1=1 if GPS board present
Bit 2=1 if error communicating
with GPS

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Bit 3=1 if failed to lock

within an allotted time
(gpsMaxTurnOnTime)
Bit 4=1 if not locked
Bit 5=1 when GPS power is ON
Bits 6,7=undefined */
03a

3a

03b

3b-3f unsigned char bytepad[5]; /* for expansion */

040

40-41 unsigned short gpsLockFailCount;

/* # of times GPS failed to locked
within gpsMaxTurnOnTime */
42-43 unsigned short gpsUpdateRTCCount; /* # of times GPS actually
updated the RTC */
44-45 short acqDelay; /* time in msec between actual
A/D conversion and DSP output */
46-47 short gpsLatitude; /* latitude x 100 , degrees North */
48-49 short gpsLongitude; /* longitude x 100, degrees East */
4a-4b short gpsAltitude; /* altitude in meters */
4c-4d unsigned short dacCount; /* dac counts */
4e-4f short wordpad; /* for expansion */
50-53 short gpsLastDrift[2]; /* in msec.; e.g. 5 = RTC was
5 msec faster than GPS */

042
044
046
048
04a
04c
04e
050

054

unsigned char gpsSOH; /* Current state of health;

same as Acutime SOH code */

54-5b unsigned long gpsLastTurnOnTime[2];

/* time when GPS was last turned on */
5c-63 unsigned long gpsLastUpdateTime[2]; /* time of last RTC update

05c
*/
064
06c

64-6b unsigned long gpsLastLockTime[2]; /* time of last GPS lock */

6c-7b long dwordpad[4]; /* for expansion */
};

//-----------------/* 7ch(124) */
//-----------------BEYOND THIS POINT 12-CHANNEL AND 18-CHANNEL HEADERS ARE DIFFERENT !!!!!!!!!
The CHANNEL_RO_PARMS is a dynamic structure. That is, each channel is NOT
assigned a specific location, but the recorded channels are entered
consecutively.
struct CHANNEL_RO_PARMS {
K2
07c
080
084
088
08c
090
094

MW
07c
080
084
088
08c
090
094

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 1st recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

0a0
0a4
0a8
0ac
0b0

0a0
0a4
0a8
0ac
0b0

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13

// 2nd recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 171

0b4 0b4 14-17

0b8 0b8 18-23

long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

0c4
0c8
0cc
0d0
0d4
0d8
0dc

0c4
0c8
0cc
0d0
0d4
0d8
0dc

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 3rd recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

0e8
0ec
0f0
0f4
0f8
0fc
100

0e8
0ec
0f0
0f4
0f8
0fc
100

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 4th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

10c
110
114
118
11c
120
124

10c
110
114
118
11c
120
124

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 5th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

130
134
138
13c
140
144
148

130
134
138
13c
140
144
148

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 6th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

154
158
15c
160
164
168
16c

154
158
15c
160
164
168
16c

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 7th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

178
17c
180
184
188
18c
190

178
17c
180
184
188
18c
190

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 8th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

19c
1a0
1a4
1a8
1ac

19c
1a0
1a4
1a8
1ac

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13

// 9th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */

Page 172

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

1b0 1b0 14-17

1b4 1b4 18-23

long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

1c0
1c4
1c8
1cc
1d0
1d4
1d8

1c0
1c4
1c8
1cc
1d0
1d4
1d8

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 10th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

1e4
1e8
1ec
1f0
1f4
1f8
1fc

1e4
1e8
1ec
1f0
1f4
1f8
1fc

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 11th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

208
20c
210
214
218
21c
220

208
20c
210
214
219
21c
220

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 12th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

---------------

22c
230
234
238
23c
240
244

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 13th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

---------------

250
254
258
25c
260
264
268

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 14th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

---------------

274
278
27c
280
284
288
28c

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 15th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

-----------

298
29c
2a0
2a4
2a8

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13

// 16th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 173

--- 2ac 14-17

--- 2b0 18-23

long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

---------------

2bc
2c0
2c4
2c8
2cc
2d0
2d4

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 17th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */

---------------

2e0
2e4
2e8
2ec
2f0
2f4
2f8

0-3
4-7
8-b
c-f
10-13
14-17
18-23

// 18th recorded channel

long maxPeak;/* raw sample counts */
unsigned long maxPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long minPeak;
unsigned long minPeakOffset; /* offset from start of file */
long mean; /* raw sample counts */
long aqOffset;
long dwordpad[3];/* for expansion */
};

//-----------------// K2
Mt. Whitney
/* 12 channels @ 24h(36) = 1b0h(432) 18 channels @ 24h(36) = 288h(648) */
/* 12ch 7ch+1b0h=22ch(556)
18ch 7ch+288h=304h(772) */
//-----------------struct STREAM_RO_PARMS {
K2 MW
22c 304 0-3
230 308 4-7
234 30c 8-b
238 310 c-d
23a 312 e-f

23c
23e
240
244
248

314
316
318
31C
320

10-11
12-13
14-17
18-1b
1c-1f

unsigned long startTime; /* first sample time,

includes PEM */
unsigned long triggerTime;
unsigned long duration; /* in # of frames; note:
frames may have different sizes */
unsigned integer errors;
unsigned integer flags;
/* Bit 0 = 1 if functional test,
FT */
/* 0 & 1 = 1 if sensor response
test, SRT */
/*
2 = 1 if recorded trigger
data, TRIG DATA */
unsigned integer startTimeMsec;
unsigned integer triggerTimeMsec;
unsigned long nscans; /* # of scans in the event */
Unsigned long triggerbitmap
/* Bit 0 = Channel 1, 7/96 */
unsigned long pad[1]; /* for expansion */
};

//-----------------// K2
/* 12ch 22ch+20h=24ch(588)
//------------------

Mt. Whitney
18 ch 304h+20h=324h(804) */

struct RW_PARMS rwParms;

/* Group read/write parms into one structure */
struct RW_PARMS {
struct MISC_RW_PARMS misc {

Page 174

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

K2 MW
24c 324 0-1
24e 326 2-3
250 328 4-8
255
276
278
27c
280

32d
34e
350
354
358

9-29
2a-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-35

288 360 36

unsigned short serialNumber;

unsigned short nchannels; /* number of channels used */
#define STN_ID_LENGTH 5
char stnID[STN_ID_LENGTH]; /* null terminated */
#define COMMENT_LENGTH 33
char comment[COMMENT_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
short elevation; /* meters above sea level */
float latitude; /* degrees North */
float longitude; /* degrees East */
short userCodes[4];

/* Cutler grabber */
unsigned char cutlerCode;
/* 0: Cutler Off
1: 4800 baud
2: 9600 baud
3: 19200 baud
4: 38400 baud
5: 57600 baud */

289 361 37

unsigned char minBatteryVoltage; /* minimum alarm battery

voltage x 10 Not Used*/

28a 362 38

unsigned char cutler_decimation;

// not used
/* Cutler grabber decimation factor */
/* valid 1:1(raw) 1:2 1:4 1:5 1:10 1:20 */
/* restrictions on 1:4 @ 250 sps? */
unsigned char cutler_irig_type;
/* 0:B
1:E (default)
2:H , MCU generated IRIG type,
Mt. Whitney ONLY*/
unsigned long cutler_bitmap; /* Cutler grabber bit map */
unsigned long channel_bitmap; /* channels selected for
acq storage */
unsigned char cutler_protocol; /* CRLF, KMI/Agbabian */
char siteID[17]; /* added 7/96 */

28b 363 39

28c 364 40-43

290 368 44-47
294 36c 48
295 36d 49-59

2a6 37e 5a
2a7 37f 5b

/* Network */
unsigned char externalTrigger; /* either 1 (on) or 0
(off) Not Used*/
unsigned char networkFlag; /* BIT0 = 0 (Master) or = 1
(Slave) Not Used*/
};

//-----------------// K2
/* 12ch 248c+5ch=2a8h(680)
//------------------

MW
18ch

324h+5ch=380h(896) */

struct TIMING_RW_PARMS {
K2 MW
2a8 380 0
2a9 381 1
2aa 382 2-7
2b0 388 8-9

March, 2006

unsigned char gpsTurnOnInterval; /* minutes between GPS

update checking */
unsigned char gpsMaxTurnOnTime; /* max time in minutes GPS
tries to lock before giving up */
unsigned char bytepad[6];
short localOffset; /* time ahead of UTC;
if this parameter is non-zero, then all times are in
UTC time. If this parameter is zero, then all times are
based on local time.
0-23 = hours

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 175

2a2 38a a-f

2b6 390 10-1f

>= 24 = minutes */
short wordpad[3];
long dwordpad[4];
};

//-----------------// K2
// 12ch
2a8h+20h=2c8h(712)
//-----------------

MW
18ch

380h+20h=3a0h(928)

The CHANNEL_RW_PARMS are channel specific, that is a channel's read/write

parameters are always in the same location.
struct CHANNEL_RW_PARMS [MAX_CHANNELS] {
#define CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH 5
// channel 1
K2 MW
2c8 3a0 0-4
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
2cd 3a5 5
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
2ce 3a6 6-7
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
2d0 3a8 8-9
short north; /* displacement */
2c2 3aa a-b
short east; /* displacement */
2d4 3ac c-d
short up; /* displacement */
2d6 3ae e-f
short altitude;
2d8 3b0 10-11
short azimuth;
2da 3b2 12-13
unsigned short sensorType;
2dc 3b4 14-15
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
2de 3b6 16-17
unsigned short gain;
2e0 3b8 18
2e1 3b9 19

2e7 3bf 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter;
/* type of bandpass filter for */
/* for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

2e8
2ec
2f0
2f4
2f8
2fc
300
304

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

2e2 3ba 1a
2e3 3bb 1b
2e4 3bc 1c-1d
2e6 3be 1e

3c0
3c4
3c8
3cc
3d0
3d4
3d8
3dc

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

314 3ec 0-4

319 3f1 5
31a 3f2 6-7
31c
31e
320
322
324
326

Page 176

3f4
3f6
3f8
3fa
3fc
3fe

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13

// channel 2
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

328 400 14-15

32a 402 16-17
32c 404 18
32d 405 19

unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;

/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

333 40b 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

334
338
33c
340
344
348
34c
350

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

32e 406 1a
32f 407 1b
330 408 1c-1d
332 40a 1e

40c
410
414
418
41c
420
424
428

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

360 438 0-4

365 43d 5
366 43e 6-7
364
36a
36c
36e
370
372
374

440
442
444
446
448
44a
44c

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

376 44e 16-17

378 450 18
379 451 19

// channel 3
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

37f 457 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

380
384
388
38c
390
394
398
39c

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

37a 452 1a
37b 453 1b
37c 454 1c-1d
37e 456 1e

458
45c
460
464
468
46c
470
474

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

3ac 484 0-4

3a1 489 5
3a2 48a 6-7

March, 2006

// channel 4
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 177

3b4
3b6
3b8
3ba
3bc
3be
3c0

48c
48e
490
492
494
496
498

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

3c2 49a 16-17

3c4 49c 18
3c5 49d 19

/* high word of serial number */

short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

3cb 4a3 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

3cc
3d0
3d4
3d8
3dc
3e0
3e4
3e8

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

3c6 49e 1a
3c7 49f 1b
3c8 4a0 1c-1d
3ca 4a2 1e

4a4
4a8
4ac
4b0
4b4
4b8
4bc
4c0

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

3f8 4d0 0-4

3fd 4d5 5
3fe 4d6 6-7
400
402
404
406
408
40a
40c

4d8
4da
4dc
4de
4e0
4e2
4e4

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

40e 4e6 16-17

410 4e8 18
411 4e9 19

// channel 5
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

417 4ef 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

418
41c
420
424
428
42v

float
float
float
float
float
float

412 4ea 1a
413 4eb 1b
414 4ec 1c-1d
416 4ee 1e

Page 178

4f0
4f4
4f8
4fc
500
504

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37

fullscale; /* volts */
sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
damping; /* fraction of critical */
naturalFrequency; /* hz */
triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

430 508 38-3b

434 50c 3c-4b

444 51c 0-4

449 521 5
44a 522 6-7
44c
44e
450
452
454
456
458

524
526
528
52a
52c
52e
530

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

45a 532 16-17

45c 534 18
45d 535 19

float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */

Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */
// channel 6
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

463 53b 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

464
468
46c
470
474
478
47c
480

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

45e 536 1a
45f 537 1b
460 538 1c-1d
462 53a 1e

53c
540
544
548
54c
550
554
558

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

490 568 0-4

495 56d 5
496 56e 6-7
498
49a
49c
49e
4a0
4a2
4a4

570
572
574
576
578
57a
57c

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

4a6 57e 16-17

4a8 580 18
4a9 581 19
4aa 582 1a
4ab 583 1b
4ac 584 1c-1d
4ae 586 1e
4af 587 1f

March, 2006

// channel 7
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;
unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */
unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 179

4b0
4b4
4b8
4bc
4c0
4c4
4c8
4cc

588
58c
590
594
598
59c
5a0
5a4

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

4dc 5b4 0-4

4e1 5b9 5
4e2 5ba 6-7
4e4
4e6
4e8
4ea
4ec
4ee
4f0

5bc
5be
5c0
5c2
5c4
5c6
5c8

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

4f2 5ca 16-17

4f4 5cc 18
4f5 5cd 19

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */
// channel 8
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

4fb 5d3 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

4fc
500
504
508
50c
510
514
518

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

4f6 5ce 1a
4f7 5cf 1b
4f8 5d0 1c-1d
4fa 5d2 1e

5d4
5d8
5dc
5e0
5e4
5e8
5ec
5f0

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

528 600 0-4

52d 605 5
52e 606 6-7
530
532
534
536
538
53a
53c

608
60a
60c
60e
610
612
614

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

53e 616 16-17

540 618 18
541 619 19

Page 180

// channel 9
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;
unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */
unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

542 61a 1a
543 61b 1b
544 61c 1c-1d

547 61f 1f

unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */

unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

548
54c
550
554
558
55c
560
564

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

546 61e 1e

620
624
628
62c
630
634
638
63c

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

574 64c 0-4

579 651 5
57a 652 6-7
57c
57e
580
582
584
586
588

654
656
658
65a
65c
65e
660

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

58a 662 16-17

58c 664 18
58d 665 19

// channel 10
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

593 66b 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

594
598
59c
5a0
5a4
5a8
5ac
5b0

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

58e 666 1a
58f 667 1b
590 668 1c-1d
592 66a 1e

66c
670
674
678
67c
680
684
688

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

5c0 698 0-4

5c5 69d 5
5c6 69e 6-7
5c8
5ca
5cc
5ce
5d0
5d2

March, 2006

6a0
6a2
6a4
6a6
6a8
6aa

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13

// channel 11
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 181

5d4 6ac 14-15

5d6 6ae 16-17
5d8 6b0 18
5d9 6b1 19

unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;

/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

5df 6b7 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

5e0
5e4
5e8
5ec
5f0
5f4
5f8
5fc

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

5da 6b2 1a
5db 6b3 1b
5dc 6b4 1c-1d
5de 6b6 1e

6b8
6bc
6c0
6c4
6c8
6cc
6d0
6d4

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

60c 6e4 0-4

611 6e9 5
612 6ea 6-7
614
616
618
61a
61c
61e
620

6ec
6ee
6f0
6f2
6f4
6f6
6f8

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

622 6fa 16-17

624 6fc 18
625 6fd 19

// channel 12
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

62b 704 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

62c
630
634
638
63c
640
644
648

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

626 6fe 1a
627 6ff 1b
628 700 1c-1d
62a 702 1e

704
708
70c
710
714
718
71c
720

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

--- 730 0-4

--- 735 5
--- 736 6-7

Page 182

// channel 13
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

---------------

738
73a
73c
73e
740
742
744

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

--- 746 16-17

--- 748 18
--- 749 19

/* high word of serial number */

short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

--- 74f 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

-----------------

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

--- 74a 1a
--- 74b 1b
--- 74c 1c-1d
--- 74e 1e

750
754
758
75c
760
764
768
76c

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

--- 77c 0-4

--- 781 5
--- 782 6-7
---------------

784
786
788
78a
78c
78e
790

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

--- 792 16-17

--- 794 18
--- 795 19

// channel 14
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

--- 79a 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

-------------

float
float
float
float
float
float

--- 796 1a
--- 797 1b
--- 798 1c-1d
--- 79a 1e

March, 2006

79c
7a0
7a4
7a8
7ac
7b0

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37

fullscale; /* volts */
sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
damping; /* fraction of critical */
naturalFrequency; /* hz */
triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 183

--- 7b4 38-3b

--- 7b8 3c-4b

--- 7c8 0-4

--- 7cd 5
--- 7ce 6-7
---------------

7d0
7d2
7d4
7d6
7d8
7da
7dc

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

--- 7de 16-17

--- 7e0 18
--- 7e1 19

float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */

Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */
// channel 15
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

--- 7e7 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

-----------------

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

--- 7e2 1a
--- 7e3 1b
--- 7e4 1c-1d
--- 7e6 1e

7e8
7ec
7f0
7f4
7f8
7fc
800
804

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

--- 814 0-4

--- 819 5
--- 81a 6-7
---------------

81c
81e
820
822
824
826
828

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

--- 82a 16-17

--- 82c 18
--- 82d 19
--- 82e 1a
--- 82f 1b
--- 830 1c-1d
--- 832 1e
--- 833 1f

Page 184

// channel 16
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;
unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */
unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

-----------------

834
838
83c
840
844
848
84c
850

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

--- 860 0-4

--- 865 5
--- 866 6-7
---------------

868
86a
86c
86e
870
872
874

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

--- 876 16-17

--- 878 18
--- 879 19

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad[16]; /* reserved */
// channel 17
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short
sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

--- 87f 1f

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter
for trigger, default CSM */
unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */

-----------------

float fullscale; /* volts */

float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */

--- 87a 1a
--- 87b 1b
--- 87c 1c-1d
--- 87e 1e

880
884
888
88c
890
894
898
89c

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

--- 8c2 16-17

// channel 18
char id[CHANNEL_ID_LENGTH]; /* NULL terminated */
char bytepad; /* for expansion */
unsigned short sensorSerialNumberExt;
/* high word of serial number */
short north; /* displacement */
short east; /* displacement */
short up; /* displacement */
short altitude;
short azimuth;
unsigned short sensorType;
unsigned short sensorSerialNumber;
/* low word of serial number */
unsigned short gain;

--- 8c4 18
--- 8c5 19

unsigned char triggertype; /* type of trigger calculation */

unsigned char iirtrigfilter; /* type of bandpass filter

--- 8ac 0-4

--- 8b1 5
--- 8b2 6-7
---------------

March, 2006

8b4
8b6
8b8
8ba
8bc
8be
8c0

8-9
a-b
c-d
e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 185

--- 8c6 1a
--- 8c7 1b
--- 8c8 1c-1d
--- 8ca 1e
--- 8cb 1f
-----------------

8cc
8d0
8d4
8d8
8dc
8e0
8e4
8e8

20-23
24-27
28-2b
2c-2f
30-33
34-37
38-3b
3c-4b

for trigger, default CSM */

unsigned char stasecondsTten; /* sta seconds times 10 */
unsigned char ltaseconds; /* lta seconds */
unsigned short sta/ltaratio; /* sta/lta trigger ratio
times 10 */
unsigned char sta/ltaprecent; /* sta/lta detrigger */
/* percent of trigger ratio*/
char bytepad1[1]; /* reserved */
float fullscale; /* volts */
float sensitivity; /* in volts per unit (e.g., g's) */
float damping; /* fraction of critical */
float naturalFrequency; /* hz */
float triggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float detriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
float alarmTriggerThreshold; /* % of fullscale */
Char bytepad2[16]; /* reserved */
};

//-----------------// K2
/* 12ch
2c8h+ (12*76) 390h(912)=658H(1624)
MW
18ch
3a0h+ (18*76) 558h(1368)=8f8h(2296)
//------------------

*/

struct STREAM_RW_PARMS {
K2

MW

658 8f8 0

659
65a
65b
660
662
664

8f9
8fa
8fb
900
902
904

1
2
3-7
8-9
a-b
c-d

666
668
66a
66c
66e

906
908
90a
90c
90e

e-f
10-11
12-13
14-15
16-17

670 910 18
671 911 19
672 912 1a

673 913 1b
674 914 1c-1d

676 916 1e-1f

678 918 20-21

Page 186

unsigned char filterFlag; /* BIT0 = 1 if filtered data;

BIT1 = 1 if auto FT after Event
BIT2 = 1 if compressed */
unsigned char primaryStorage; /* = 0 for drive A: ,etc. */
unsigned char secondaryStorage; /* = 1 for drive B:, etc. */
unsigned char bytepad[5]; /* for expansion */
unsigned short eventNumber; /* *NOT USED* */
unsigned short sps; /* sampling rate */
unsigned short apw;
/* array propagation window, in seconds*/
unsigned short preEvent; /* in seconds */
unsigned short postEvent; /* in seconds */
unsigned short minRunTime; /* in seconds */
short triggerThreshold; /* signed number */
short detriggerThreshold;
char bytepada;
unsigned char FilterType; /* FirB: 0 regular, 1 causal */
unsigned char DataFmt; /* Serial Data Stream:
0=uncompressed
1=compressed */
char Reserved;
short Timeout;
/* Serial Data Stream:
*/
/* mode:
*/
/*
1 - 0
default
*/
/*
2 - 6..32767
*/
/*
send 'continue cmd'*/
/*
3 - -1 cmd for each block */
unsigned short TxBlkSize; /* Serial Data Strea (unused)
unsigned short BufferSize; /* Serial Data Stream: */
/* size of #SSTRBUF.BINfile in disk */

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

*/

67a 91a 22-23

67c 91c 24-27
680 980 28-2f

/* number of 16,384 byte blocks */

/* default= 64 - 1Meg */
unsigned short SampleRate; /* Serial Data Stream:
long TxChanMap; /* Serial Data Stream: */
/* select up to 6 channels */
long dwordpad[2]; /* for expansion */

//-----------------// K2
/* 12ch
658h+ 30H= 688h(1672)
//------------------

MW
18ch

*/

8f8h + 30h= 928h(2344) */

/* Voter info: one entry for each channel,

network, external, keyboard selected */
/* A dynamic structure, that is each source
is NOT assigned a specific location */
/* and they can be in any order. */
/* 'unsigned char number' is only valid if
the 'unsigned char type' is 'C' */
#define STREAM_MAX_VOTERS (MAX_CHANNELS +3)
/* K2: 12 + 3 = 15, Mt. Whitney: 18 + 3 = 21 */
struct VOTER_INFO [STREAM_MAX_VOTERS] {
K2 MW
688 928 0

689 929 1
68a 92a 2-3

// voter 1
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
/* 'C' channel */
/* 'E' external */
/* 'K' keyboard */
/* 'N' network */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

68c 92c 0
68d 92d 1
68e 92e 2-3

// voter 2
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

690 930 0
691 931 1
692 932 2-3

// voter 3
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

694 934 0
695 935 1
696 936 2-3

// voter 4
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

698 938 0
699 939 1
69a 93a 2-3

// voter 5
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

69c 93c 0
69d 93d 1
69e 93e 2-3

// voter 6
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

6a0 940 0
6a1 941 1

// voter 7
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 187

6a2 942 2-3

short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

6a4 944 0
6a5 945 1
6a6 946 2-3

// voter 8
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

6a8 948 0
6a9 949 1
6aa 94a 2-3

// voter 9
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

6ac 94c 0
6ad 94d 1
6ae 94e 2-3

// voter 10
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

6b0 950 0
6b1 951 1
6b2 952 2-3

// voter 11
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

6b4 954 0
6b5 955 1
6b6 956 2-3

// voter 12
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

6b8 958 0
6b9 959 1
6ba 95a 2-3

// voter 13
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

6bc 95c 0
6bd 95d 1
6be 95e 2-3

// voter 14
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

6c0 960 0
6c1 961 1
6c2 962 2-3

// voter 15
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

--- 964 0
--- 965 1
--- 966 2-3

// voter 16
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

--- 968 0
--- 969 1
--- 96a 2-3

// voter 17
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

--- 96c 0
--- 96d 1
--- 96e 2-3

// voter 18
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

--- 970 0
--- 971 1
--- 972 2-3

// voter 19
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */
// voter 20

Page 188

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

--- 974 0
--- 975 1
--- 976 2-3

unsigned char type; /* voter type code */

unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */

--- 978 0
--- 979 1
--- 97a 2-3

// voter 21
unsigned char type; /* voter type code */
unsigned char number; /* channel number */
short weight; /* voting weight: range is -100 to 100 */
};

//-----------------// K2
/* 12ch
688 + (15*4)[3ch(60)] = 6c4h(1732)
MW
18ch
928h + (21*4)[54h(84)] = 97ch(2428)
//-----------------#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define

*/

MODEM_INITCMD_LENGTH 64
MODEM_DIALPREFIX_LENGTH 16
MODEM_DIALSUFFIX_LENGTH 16
MODEM_HANGUPCMD_LENGTH 16
MODEM_AUTOANSWERON_LENGTH 16
MODEM_AUTOANSWEROFF_LENGTH 16
MODEM_PHONES 4
MODEM_PHONENUMBER_LENGTH 24

struct MODEM_RW_PARMS {
K2

MW

6c4 97c 0-3f

704 9bc 40-4f
714 9cc
724 9dc
734 9ec
744 9fc
754 a0c
76c
784
79c
7b4
7b5
7b6
7b7

a24
a3c
a54
a6c
a6d
a6e
a6f

7b8
7b9
7ba
7bc
7be
7c0
7c2
7c4

a70
a71
a72
a74
a76
a78
a7a
a7c

char initCmd[MODEM_INITCMD_LENGTH]; /* initialization string */

char dialingPrefix [MODEM_DIALPREFIX_LENGTH];
/* dialing prefix */
50-5f
char dialingSuffix [MODEM_DIALSUFFIX_LENGTH];
60-6f
char hangupCmd [MODEM_HANGUPCMD_LENGTH];
70-7f
char autoAnswerOnCmd [MODEM_AUTOANSWERON_LENGTH];
/* NOT USED */
80-8f
char autoAnswerOffCmd [MODEM_AUTOANSWEROFF_LENGTH];
/* NOT USED */
1 90-a7 char phoneNumber[MODEM_PHONES] [MODEM_PHONENUMBER_LENGTH];
/* 4 phone numbers, ONLY 2 are currently used */
2 a8-bf
3 c0-d7
4 d8-ef
f0
unsigned char waitForConnection; /* secs */
f1
unsigned char pauseBetweenCalls; /* secs */
f2
unsigned char maxDialAttempts;
f3
char cellShare
/* K2 ONLY, 0= 1Hzoutput,
1= cellphone -- FUTURE USE */
f4
char cellOnTime
/* duration */
f5
char cellWarmupTime
1 f6-f7 short cellStartTime[5]
2 f8-f9
3 fa-fb
4 fc-fd
5 fe-ff
100-103 char bytepad[4]

7c8 a80 104-105

March, 2006

unsigned
/* BIT0
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3

short flags;
= 1 to enable auto
= 1 to call out on
= 1 to call out on
= 1 to call out on

Document 302219 Rev P

call out
battery < 12 V
battery charge failed
extreme temperature

Page 189

BIT4 = 1 to call out on event

BIT5 = 1 to call out on GPS lock failure */
7ca a82 106-133 char callOutMsg[46];
}; // modem rw
}; // rw
}; // header
7f8(2040)

ab0(2736)

//-----------------// K2
/* 12ch
6c4h + 134h(308) = 7f8h(2040)
MW
18ch
97ch + 134h(308)= ab0h(2736) */
//------------------

Page 190

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

APPENDIX B - K2 and Mt. Whitney File Structure

The K2 and Mt. Whitney .EVT file consists of three structures, a TAG, a FILE HEADER and a
FRAME HEADER. The TAG precedes the FILE HEADER and each FRAME HEADER.
FILE .EVT
TAG
FILE HEADER

16 bytes
2040 or 2736

// K2 = 2040 Mt. Whitney = 2736

------------ for each 1/10 of a second of data

TAG
16 bytes
FRAME HEADER
32 bytes
DATA
10 * 1 * 3 = 30 bytes 1 channel @ 100 sps to
25 * 18 * 3 = 1350 bytes 18 channels @ 250 sps
Data is in scans, lowest recorded channel first
These three structures repeat for all of the data recorded in the event.
TAG structure:
/*----------------------------------------------*/
/*
K2 TAG FRAME HEADER */
/*----------------------------------------------*/
/* STRUCTURE TYPE CODES */
#define KFF_K2_HDR 1 /* K2 header */
#define KFF_K2_FRAME 2 /* K2 FRAME;
frame data follows */
#define KFF_BYTE_ORDER 1/* 0=INTEL (LSB first) ,
1 = MOTOROLA (MSB first) */
#define KFF_VERSION 1
#define KFF_SYNC_CHAR 'K'
/* TAG. Separates and identifies structures */
typedef struct {
000h
unsigned char sync; /* sync character 'K' */
001h
unsigned char byteOrder; /* = 0 for LSB first (INTEL),
1 for MSB first (MOTOROLA) */
002h
unsigned char version; /* File format version; KFF_VERSION */
003h
unsigned char instrumentType; /* instrument type code */
004h
unsigned long type; /* structure type code */
008h
unsigned short length; /* structure size in bytes */
/* # bytes in file header or in frame header */
00ah
unsigned short dataLength; /* # of data bytes following the structure */
/* 00 if file header, else # of data multiplexed data bytes */
00ch
unsigned short id; /* unique instrument id (e.g. serial number);
used for multi-instrument files */
00eh
unsigned short checksum; /* 16 bit checksum of structure + data */
} KFF_TAG;
// 010h bytes

FRAME HEADER structure:

/*---------------------------------------------------*/

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 191

/* K2 Event Frame Structure */

/*---------------------------------------------------*/
#define
#define
#define
#define

FRAME_HEADER_SIZE 32 /* bytes */
MW_FRAME_HEADER_TYPE 4 /* 4 for 24 ch */
K2_FRAME_HEADER_TYPE 3 /* 3 for 16 ch */
TIMECODE_BYTES 13

typedef struct { /* 32 bytes */

000h
unsigned char frameType; /* like a version #,
= FRAME_HEADER_TYPE */
001h
unsigned char instrumentCode; /* instrument code */
002h
unsigned short recorderID;
004h
unsigned short frameSize; /* # of frame bytes, includes 32
byte header */
006h
unsigned long blockTime; /* block time */
00ah
unsigned short channelBitMap; /* 1 bit for each ch. in use.
Ch. 1 is bit 0 */
00ch
unsigned short streamPar; /* see comments below */
00eh
unsigned char frameStatus; /* see comments below */
00fh
unsigned char frameStatus2; /* see comments below */
010h
unsigned short msec; /* 0..999 */
012h
unsigned char channelBitMap1; /* extended chan bit map, ch17-24 */
013h-02fh
unsigned char timeCode[TIMECODE_BYTES]; /* time code, see comment
below */
} FRAME_HEADER;
// 020 h bytes
/* FRAME_HEADER Description:
frameStatus:
Bits 0-3 = frame sequence number 0..9
Bit 4
= stream triggered flag. Set if frame exceeds stream
trigger level.
Bit 5
= Compressed flag. Set if compressed frame.
Bits 6-7 = Sample size. 1=16 bits (2 bytes), 2=24 bits (3 bytes)
3=32 bits (4 bytes)
Samples are expressed as a signed integer of digital counts.
frameStatus2:
Bit 0 = set if issued the ADD SCAN command
Bits 1-7 = currently unused.
streamPar:
Bits 0-11 = Stream sampling rate, 1..4095
Bits 12-15 = Stream number 0..15
timeCode[]:
Time code sampled every millisecond.
Bits 4-7 of timeCode[0] = time code type (TBD)
Bit 3 of timeCode[0] = time code bit sampled at first msec of frame
(0=low, 1=high)
Bit 2 of timeCode[0] = time code bit at 2nd msec.
Bit 0 of timeCode[12] = last (100th msec) bit of time code
*/
/*----------------------------------------------------*/
/*----------------------------------------------------*/

Page 192

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

APPENDIX C - Altus Instrument Time Structures Defined

Time is stored in the .EVT File Header and each Frame Header as seconds since January 1, 1980
and in milliseconds.
In the File Header two times are specified:
unsigned long

stream_ro_parms.startTime;

unsigned int

/* first sample time,

includes PEM */
stream_ro_parms. startTimeMsec; /* 0..999 */

unsigned long
unsigned int

stream_ro_parms.triggerTime;
stream_ro_parms.triggerTimeMsec;

In each Frame Header, the time of that frame of data is stored as:
unsigned long
unsigned short

frame_header.blockTime;
frame_header.msec;

/* block time */
/* 0..999 */

To convert from
unsigned long, time

/* seconds since 1/1/80 */

to
int,
int,
int,
int,
int,
int,
int,
int,

year
day_of_year
month
day_of_month
hour
minute
second
millisecond

use the following algorithm for years between 1980 and 2100 (2100 is a century that is not a leap
year). The year 1980 was a leap year. Four year sets of days (4 years = 1 @ 366, 3 @ 365 = 1461
days) can be used in the time conversion.
BEGIN:
second

= (int) (time mod 60);

time

= time / 60;

// modulo or remainder function,

// remainder = seconds
// time in minutes

minute
time

= (int) (time mod 60);

= time / 60;

// remainder = minutes
// time in hours

hour
time

= (int) (time mod 24);

= time / 24;

// remainder = hours
// time in days

year

= 1980 + (int) ((time / 1461) * 4);

// 1461 days in 4 years, 3 @ 365,

// 2 @ 366

time
= time mod 1461;
If (time >= 366)
{
time = time - 366;
year
year = year + 1;
year

March, 2006

// more than one year

// first year of set is the leap

= year + (int)(time / 365);

Document 302219 Rev P

// add second or third year of set

Page 193

time = time mod 365;

}
day_of_year = (int)(time + 1);

// # of days in last year of set

if (year is a leapyear)
except

// Leap years are divisible by 4

// add 1 since day 1 = Jan 1

//
//
//
//
//
//
//
//

century years
( (year mod 100 ? 0) AND
(year mod 4 = 0) )
Leap years are century years
divisible by 400
(2000 is a leap year)
( (year mod 100 = 0) AND
(year mod 400 = 0) )

{
if (day_of_year = 60)
{
month = 2;
day_of_month = 29;
END;
}
if (day_of_year > 60)
day_of_year = day_of_year - 1;

// January 31 + Feburary
// 29 = 60 days
// adjust so regular routine below
// will work.

}
int mon[] = {31,28,31,30,31,30,31,31,30,31,30,31};
int I;

//

January = 1

for (I = 1; I <= 12; I++)

{
if (day_of_year <= mon[i])
{
day_of_month = day_of_year;
month = I;
END;
}
day_of_year = day_of_year - mon[i];
}

The file KW2ASC.SRC found in the Altus support software directory is the source code for the
program KW2ASC. The functions CK2Time(), Seconds2Time(), Day2Month() and IsLeapYear()
are the 'C' language routines that translate the .EVT times.

Page 194

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

APPENDIX D - Diagnostic Command EEPROM - 'D' Display

EEPROM pages in Hex
The K2 response to the EEPROM 'D' command:
DG>eep<cr> Enter ? for help [Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: ? Commands: >
Increment device number < Decrement device number D Display EEPROM contents
F Dump FBA data H View EEPROM Header Q Quit
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: d 000000: 01 00 01 B2 01 E8 00 5D AB 01 00 00
44 20 20 20 - .......]....D 000010: 36 20 20 20 00 92 15 00 00 87 00 00 00 00
00 00 - 6 ............ 000020: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
- ................ 000030: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000040: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000050: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000060: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000070: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ [Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: >
[Device #2 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: d 000000: 01 01 02 BC 01 E5 00 7B AB 01 00 00
41 20 20 20 - .......{....A 000010: 33 20 20 20 00 93 15 00 00 A9 00 00 00 00
00 00 - 3 ............ 000020: 00 60 8C 00 00 02 00 00 A0 3F 96 14 42 00 00 00
- .`.......?..B... 000030: 00 64 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .d.............. 000040: 00 00 00 EC 1D 33 0A 6B 04 99 1C 00 00 00 00 00 .....3.k........ 000050: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000060: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 61 8C 00 00 02 00 00 A0 3F .......a.......? 000070: FA 14 43 00 00 00 00 64 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ..C....d........ 000080: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 F6 1D 13 0C 1B 04 5B ...............[ 000090: 19 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000A0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 62 8C 00 .............b.. 0000B0: 00 02 00 00 A0 3F A0 14 3F 00 00 00 00 64 00 00 .....?..?....d.. 0000C0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CE ................ 0000D0: 1D F3 0D FD 03 83 23 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ......#......... 0000E0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000F0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ [Device #2 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #3 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: d 000000: 01 01 03 D0 01 BE 00 B2 AB 01 00 00
41 20 20 20 - ............A 000010: 35 20 20 20 00 93 15 00 00 D0 00 00 00 00
00 00 - 5 ............ 000020: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
- ................ 000030: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000040: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000050: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000060: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000070: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000080: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000090: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000A0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000B0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000C0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000D0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000E0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000F0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ [Device #3 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #4 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: d 000000: 01 01 04 F8 01 B5 00 80 AB 01 00 02
41 20 20 20 - ............A 000010: 34 20 20 20 00 7B 15 00 00 A7 00 00 00 00
00 00 - 4 .{.......... 000020: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
- ................ 000030: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000040: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000050: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 -

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 195

................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................

000060:
000070:
000080:
000090:
0000A0:
0000B0:
0000C0:
0000D0:
0000E0:
0000F0:
[Device

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
#4

00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
(SCLK1, 256

00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
bytes)]:

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
>

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

[Device #7 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: d 000010: 37 20 20 20 00 92 15 00 00 B7 00 00

00 00 00 00 - 7 ............ 000020: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 - ................ 000030: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 - ................ 000040: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000050: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000060: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000070: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ [Device #7 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: >
[Device #9 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: d 000000: 01 01 09 BC 01 3A 01 6C AB 01 00 00
42 20 20 20 - .....:.l....B 000010: 31 30 20 20 00 78 15 00 00 EB 00 00 00 00
00 00 - 10 .x.......... 000020: 01 74 09 D4 00 60 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 58 00 01
- .t...`XXXXXXXX.. 000030: 09 00 00 00 DD 00 5B 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ......[......... 000040: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000050: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000060: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000070: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000080: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000090: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000A0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000B0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000C0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000D0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000E0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 0000F0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ [Device #9 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #10 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: d ERROR READING EEPROM [Device #10 (SCLK2, 256
bytes)]: >
[Device #11 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: d ERROR READING EEPROM [Device #11 (SCLK2, 256
bytes)]: >
[Device #12 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: d ERROR READING EEPROM [Device #12 (SCLK2, 256
bytes)]: >
[Device #19 (SCLK3, 128 bytes)]: d 000000: 01 00 13 62 01 C2 00 62 AB 01 00 00
42 20 20 20 - ...b...b....B 000010: 36 20 20 20 00 8B 15 00 00 1F 00 00 00 00
00 00 - 6 ............ 000020: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
- ................ 000030: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000040: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000050: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000060: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ 000070: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................ [Device #19 (SCLK3, 128 bytes)]: >q

Page 196

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

The Mt. Whitney response to the Diagnostic EEPROM 'D' command:

DG> eep
Enter ? for help
[Device #1 (SCLK1, 128 bytes)]: ?
Commands:
> Increment device number
< Decrement device number
D Display EEPROM contents
F Dump FBA data
H View EEPROM Header
Q Quit
[Device
000000:
000010:
000020:
000030:
000040:
000060:
[Device

#1
01
20
00
00
00
00
#1

(SCLK1, 128
00 01 44 01
20 20 20 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
(SCLK1, 128

bytes)]:
B4 00 5D
5B 15 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
bytes)]:

d
AB
00
00
00
00
00
>

01
97
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00

43
00
00
00
00
00

20
00
00
00
00
00

20
00
00
00
00
00

20
00
00
00
00
00

...D...]....C
.[..........
................
................
................
................

[Device #2 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: d

ERROR READING EEPROM
[Device #2 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #3 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: d
ERROR READING EEPROM
[Device #3 (SCLK1, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device
000000:
000010:
000020:
000030:
000040:
000050:
000060:
000070:
000080:
000090:
0000A0:
0000B0:
0000C0:
0000D0:
0000E0:
0000F0:
[Device

#4
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
#4

(SCLK1, 256
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
(SCLK1, 256

bytes)]:
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
bytes)]:

d
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
>

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................
................

[Device
000000:
000010:
000020:
000030:
000040:
000050:
000060:
000070:
[Device

#7
01
37
00
00
00
00
00
00
#7

(SCLK1, 128
00 07 9E 01
20 20 20 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
(SCLK1, 128

bytes)]:
1A 01 67
3A 15 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
bytes)]:

d
AB
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
>

01
5D
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

42
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

20
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

20
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

20
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

.......g....B
7
.:...]......
................
................
................
................
................
................

[Device #9 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: d

000000: 01 01 09 BC 01 21 01 6C AB 01 00 00 42 20 20 20 - .....!.l....B
000010: 31 30 20 20 00 5A 15 00 00 B4 00 00 00 00 00 00 - 10 .Z..........

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 197

000020:
000030:
000040:
000050:
000060:
000070:
000080:
000090:
0000A0:
0000B0:
0000C0:
0000D0:
0000E0:
0000F0:
[Device

07
24
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
#9

5F 08 6B 00
00 00 00 D5
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
(SCLK2, 256

60 58 58
01 C8 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
00 00 00
bytes)]:

58
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
>

8 58 58 58 58 00 01 - ._.k.`XXXXXXXX..
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - $...............
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - ................
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - ................
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - ................
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - ................
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - ................
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - ................
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - ................
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - ................
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - ................
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - ................
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - ................
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 - ................

[Device #10 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: d

ERROR READING EEPROM
[Device #10 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #11 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: d
ERROR READING EEPROM
[Device #11 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device #12 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: d
ERROR READING EEPROM
[Device #12 (SCLK2, 256 bytes)]: >
[Device
000000:
000010:
000020:
000030:
000040:
000050:
000060:
000070:
[Device

Page 198

#19 (SCLK3,
01 00 13 6C
36 20 20 20
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
#19 (SCLK3,

128 bytes)]: d
01 B4 00 62 AB
00 09 15 00 00
00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00
128 bytes)]: >

01
99
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

Document 302219 Rev P

42
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

20
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

20
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

20
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

...l...b....B
6
............
................
................
................
................
................
................

March, 2006

APPENDIX E - Default Parameters

Default
Factory
Normal

dd = default

xx = changed

Default
Load1 Parameter
dd
dd

dd
--

xx
--

Channel Alarm
Channel Calibration

dd
dd
dd

-dd
dd

-xx
xx

Channel Gain
Channel ID
Channel Location

dd
dd

dd
--

xx
--

Channel Selection
Channel Sensor

dd

dd

xx

Channel Threshold

dd
dd
dd
dd
dd

dd
dd
dd
dd
dd

xx
xx
xx
xx
xx

dd

dd

xx

dd
dd
--

dd
dd
--

xx
xx
--

Channel TriggerType
Channel TriggerFilter
Channel STA
Channel LTA
Channel STA/LTA
Trigger Ratio
Channel STA/LTA
Detrigger Percent
Comment
DFS BaudRate
File Structure

dd

dd

xx

GPS

dd

dd

xx

Location

dd

dd

xx

Modem AUTOCALL

dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd

dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd

xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx

Modem Callout Msg

Modem HangupATH0
Modem Init
Modem Maxdial
Modem Pause
Modem Phonenumbers
Modem Prefix
Modem Suffix
Modem Wait

March, 2006

= not changed

Default Description
2.00 % of full scale
Full scale = 2.50V,
Sensitivity = 1.250 V/unit(g),
Natural Frequency = 0.0, Damping = 0.0
( or defaulted from internal FBA)
(1)
Blank
North = 0 m, East = 0 m, Up = 0 m,
Altitude = 0?, Azimuth = 0?
All Available
Type = 0, Serial number = 0
(or defaulted from internal FBA)
Trigger = 2.00% of full scale,
Detrigger = 2.00% of full scale
Threshold
Classic Strong Motion
1.0 seconds
60 seconds
4.0
40% of Channel Trigger Ratio
'DEFAULT PARAMETERS'
Off
Set at Factory = TREE, changed by AQ FILE
command
Update interval = 30 min., max. power on
time = 30 min.
Latitude = 0.0000?, Longitude = 0.0000?,
Elevation = 0.0m
OFF. At BOOT or RESET, with internal
modem, set to ON. With external modem,
not changed. No call out conditions changed.
None
AT&FE0&C1S0=1&W
(10)
10 s
1= none, 2 = none
ATDT
None
45 s

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 199

dd
--

dd
--

xx
--

Nchannels
Serial number

dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd

dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd

xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx

dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd

dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd
dd

xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx

STNID
Site ID
SDStreams Bitmap
SDStreams Block-Size
SDStreams Buffer-Size
SDStreams Format
SDStreams SampleRate
SDStreams TimeOut
Streams Anti-Alias
Filter
Streams APW
Streams FT
Streams Minrun 0 s
Streams Postevent
Streams Preevent
Streams SPS
Streams Storage
Streams Threshold
Stream Voters

--

--

--

Time

dd
dd

dd
dd

xx
xx

Usercodes
UTC Offset

3/4/6/12/18 depending
Set at factory to actual, changed by EDIT
SERIALNUMBER command
Blank
Blank
Up to first six channels
Unused.
64 - 16K units - 1M bytes for buffer
Compressed format
0 = Off, else sps used.
Mode 0, None, Continuous
Non-Causal
0s
Off
10 s
3s
200
Primary = drive A:, Secondary = drive A:
Trigger = 1 vote, Detrigger = 1 vote
All channels = 1 vote, Network = 1 vote,
Keyboard = 1 vote, External = 1 vote
Hardware default = 1/1/80 00:00:00.000
Changed by TIME command or GPS update.
(0,0,0,0)
(0) = Local time

1 LOAD a .PAR file in the terminal window or 'Transfer-to-Recorder' from QuickTalk.

NOTE: The Makalu system defaults to a full scale of 20.0V, and to a sensitivity of 10.0V/G to
support a 2G sensor.

Page 200

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

APPENDIX F - Flash Refresh

The FLASH memory in Altus recorders with old MCU boards requires periodic refresh. This
refresh becomes necessary after many writes to the flash that update only some of the sectors.
Without periodic refresh, the flash may become subject to a potential memory loss problem that
could cause loss of one of the three programs (Boot Block, DSP Block, or Application Block) or
loss of the parameters.
The application code in these instruments monitors the number of times the Application, Boot,
DSP and Parameter blocks are programmed. If this number exceeds 800 for any of the blocks, a
message will be sent to the user.
There are two possible FLASH error messages. These are:
CAUTION: Flash Chip #1 requires refresh.
Contact Kinemetrics immediately.

and
CAUTION: Flash Chip #2 requires refresh.
Contact Kinemetrics immediately.

Flash chip #1 contains the Boot block and part of the Application block. The caution message for
this chip is sent when the Application code has been updated more than 800 times.
Flash chip #2 contains part of the Application block, the Parameter block, and the DSP block.
The caution message for this block is sent when either the Parameter or the DSP blocks have been
updated more than 800 times.
To stop the display of either of these messages, the refresh command must be issued from the
Bootloader, Revision 2.03 or higher.
In some older versions of code for new MCU, these messages may also appear. The messages
have no meaning for the new MCU, as its FLASH chip does not have the refresh requirement that
the old MCU has. If a new MCU displays either of the two refresh messages, loading the newest
code version will stop the messages.
If the Bootloader is revision 2.02 or lower, the Bootloader must be updated by following the
installation instructions in the INSTALL.TXT file included in the firmware package.
The new bootloader contains 2 new commands:
<E> Erase Parameters
<R> Refresh Flash Memory

The Erase Parameters command will fill the parameter area with 0's. This command is useful in
the event that code is loaded that uses a FLASH memory map different from the previous version.
It will prevent the instrument from attempting to operate with unusable parameters, a condition
which can cause difficulty in communication between the user and the instrument.

March, 2006

Document 302219 Rev P

Page 201

The Refresh Flash Memory command will save the contents of each sector of FLASH, erase the
sector and then reprogram the sector. This process takes several minutes to complete.
When the command is issued, the instrument will respond:
Application block update counts = xx, Boot block update counts = xx
DSP block update counts = xx, Parameter update counts = xx

where xx is the actual number of update counts for that particular MCU board.
In the event that the block update counts do not exceed the limit of 800, the instrument will also
display the message:
Refresh is not required at this time. Do you want to refresh anyway (Y/N)?

and wait for a response. If the user responds with a "Y" the instrument will display the message:
Preparing to refresh Flash memory.
CAUTION: Power to the unit must be maintained until this operation has
finished. If power is not maintained the Flash memory will not be programmed
and the Flash chip may have to be removed and programmed externally.
Do you wish to continue (Y/N)?

If the user responds with "Y" the instrument will display the message:
Are you sure you want to do this (Y/N)?

If the user responds with "Y" the instrument will display the message:
This is your last chance to abort this procedure.
Do you want to abort (Y/N)?

If the user responds with "N" the instrument will refresh the flash.
Any response other than indicated above will cause the instrument to return to the bootloader
command menu.

Page 202

Document 302219 Rev P

March, 2006

Table of Figures
Figure 1 - FT Event (FBA) - Full Scale........................................................................................................ 34
Figure 1 - FT Event - Zoomed In ................................................................................................................. 35
Figure 1 - FT Event (EpiSensor) - Full Scale ............................................................................................... 36
Figure 1 - SRT Event - Full Scale ................................................................................................................ 38
Figure 1 - SRT Event - Zoomed in on Channel 2......................................................................................... 39
Figure 1 - SRT Event (EpiSensor) - Full Scale ............................................................................................ 40
Figure 1 - PSD of an EpiSensor SRT Event ................................................................................................. 41
Figure 1 - LVT and XYZ Mapping .............................................................................................................. 98
Figure 1 - Making an FBA look like an EpiSensor ...................................................................................... 99
Figure 1 - Making an EpiSensor look like an FBA ...................................................................................... 99

Index
*\\cr> ................................................................17
1. Introduction ..................................................1
2. The Terminal Window - Monitor Mode ...15
3. The Main Commands in Monitor Mode...17
4. The Parameter Editor ................................69
5. The Diagnostic Commands - Monitor Mode
....................................................................139
6. APPENDICES ..........................................167
A:, B:..........................................................17, 23
ABORT.......................................71, 83, 139, 142
ADC........................................................139, 142
ALARM ALARM n....................................17, 23
ALARM DURATION s..............................17, 24
ALARM OFF.............................................17, 24
ALARM ON/OFF/n...............................139, 143
ALARM SOH n..........................................17, 24
ANSWERMODE .......................................17, 25
APPENDIX A - Combined K2 and Mt. Whitney
Header Structure - Expanded .....................167
APPENDIX B - K2 and Mt. Whitney File
Structure .....................................................191
APPENDIX C - Altus Instrument Time Structures
Defined .......................................................193
APPENDIX D - Diagnostic Command EEPROM
- 'D' Display EEPROM pages in Hex .........195
APPENDIX E - Default Parameters...............199
APPENDIX F - Flash Refresh ........................201
AQ ....................................................................26
AQ AUTO_DELETE n..............................17, 27
AQ CLEAR_EVENT_COUNTER n .........18, 28
AQ DEBUG ...............................................18, 29
AQ DETRIGGER ......................................18, 42
AQ DIAGNOSTICS...................................18, 29
AQ DISABLE_LED n ...............................18, 30
AQ DVM ....................................................18, 31
AQ FILE ....................................................18, 33
AQ FT ........................................................18, 33
AQ ON/OFF ..............................................17, 26
AQ PEAK.........................................................18
AQ PEAK [x] ...................................................37
AQ SRT ......................................................18, 38
AQ TRIGGER............................................18, 42
AUTOBAUD n...........................................18, 42
BAT n.....................................................139, 143
BAUDRATE r............................................19, 43
BITMAP c1 c2 .. cn ...................................71, 83
BLOCKMODE...........................................19, 44
BUF256 x...................................................71, 84
CAL ........................................................139, 145
CALLMODE..............................................19, 44
CD p, CHDIR p..........................................19, 45
CELLULAR DURATION mmm ...............71, 85
CELLULAR ON n hh mm.........................71, 86

CELLULAR POWER_CONTROL mmm .72, 87

CELLULAR TRIGGER_CONTROL tr im ... 72,
87
CELLULAR WARMUP sss .......................72, 89
CHANNEL ALARM ch n.nn (n.nn n.nn) 73, 89
CHANNEL CALIBRATION ch fs s nf d ..73, 90
CHANNEL FILTER ch n .........................73, 91
CHANNEL FIXED_TYPES x ..................74, 92
CHANNEL GAIN ch g..............................74, 93
CHANNEL ID ch cs ..................................74, 94
CHANNEL LOCATION ch n e u al az.....74, 94
CHANNEL LTA ch n ................................74, 95
CHANNEL MAP g ch1 ch2 ch3 ...............74, 96
Channel mapping ..................................... 96
CHANNEL RATIOS ch tr dt.....................74, 99
CHANNEL SENSOR ch ty sn (cc rc sg).75, 100
CHANNEL STA ch n ..............................75, 103
CHANNEL THRESHOLD ch tt dt .............. 104
CHANNEL THRESHOLD ch tt td ................ 75
CHANNEL TRIGGER_TYPE ch n ........75, 105
CLEAR ALARM ........................................19, 45
CLEAR ALL_LEDS ..................................19, 45
CLEAR EVENT_LED...............................19, 45
Commands, Diagnostic ....................... 139
Commands, Diagnostic - Detailed
Description......................................... 142
Commands, Main........................................ 17
Commands, Main - Detailed
Description........................................... 23
COMMENT cs .........................................80, 106
COPY sf df .................................................19, 46
DAC [n] ......................................................... 145
DAC n............................................................ 139
Damping ........................................................ 90
DEFAULT ...............................................71, 106
Default Commands .......................................... 71
DEFAULT FACTORY ............................71, 107
DEL p .........................................................19, 46
DFS BAUDRATE cd ...............................78, 108
DFS DECIMATION cd...........................78, 108
DFS PROTOCOL cd ...............................78, 109
DFS SET c1 c2 .. cn.................................78, 109
DG ..............................................................19, 46
Diagnostic Commands.......................... 139
Diagnostic Commands - Detailed
Description......................................... 142
DIR p ..........................................................19, 46
DISPLAY BITMAP ...................................19, 47
DISPLAY CHANNEL ...............................20, 48
DISPLAY MODEM ...................................20, 48
DISPLAY RWMISC ..................................20, 49
DISPLAY SENSOR ...................................20, 49

DISPLAY SERIAL_DATA_STREAM......20, 50
DISPLAY STREAM ..................................20, 50
DISPLAY WRITE file ...............................20, 51
DUMP a b ..............................................140, 145
DVM.......................................................140, 146
EDIT ..........................................................20, 53
EEPROM ...............................................140, 146
EpiSensor .... 33, 38, 49, 76, 96, 100, 146, 150
EPISENSOR GAIN...............................140, 150
EPISENSOR RANGE ...........................140, 150
ERASE p ....................................................20, 53
External Modems................................................3
File Transfer Protocol .....................10
Firmware update ......................................61
Flash Refresh.........................................201
FORMAT .......................................................140
FORMAT d ........................................20, 53, 151
FTP...................................................................10
Full scale ..................................................90
GPIN ......................................................140, 151
GPOUT h ...............................................140, 152
GPS AVERAGING n.............................140, 152
GPS CLEAR n .......................................140, 153
GPS DEFAULT.....................................140, 153
GPS DIAGNOSTICS.............................140, 153
GPS Failed Locks..................................153
GPS mp mm cc.........................................78, 110
GPS OFF ...............................................140, 155
GPS ON..................................................140, 155
GPS PARAMETERS mod ang sig msk sw ..141,
156
GPS PULSE_COUNT n........................141, 157
GPS RESTART......................................141, 157
GPS STATUS.........................................141, 158
GPS SYNC .............................................141, 159
GPS Updates..............................................153
GSM.....................................................................5
HELP ...........................20, 54, 72, 110, 141, 159
INIT n ............................................................160
INIT n:...........................................................141
Internal Modems.................................................3
IRIG_TYPE .....................................................72
IRIG-TYPE cd ...............................................111
ISDN Terminal Adapters ("Modems")................4
LED DEBUG .........................................141, 160
LED SET........................................................141
LED SET n ....................................................161
LED START...........................................141, 161
LED STOP.............................................141, 162
LOCATION la lo el..................................80, 111
Main Commands...........................................17
Main Commands - Detailed
Description............................................23
MD p, MKDIR p ........................................20, 54
MEMTEST ............................................141, 162

Mode of Communication ................................... 1

MODEM ACKNOWLEDGMENT cs............. 78
MODEM ANSWER .................................79, 112
MODEM AUTOCALL.............................79, 113
MODEM CALLOUT_MESSAGE cs ........... 114
MODEM CALLOUT_MSG cs ....................... 79
MODEM CHECKIN_TIME hh mm dd......... 79
MODEM CHECKIN_TIME hh mm dd (hh=023 (-1=OFF), mm=0-59, dd=0-15) ........... 115
MODEM COMPLETE_CALL x (0=off, 1=on).
[0]. ........................................................79, 115
MODEM EXTEND_PAUSE n ...............79, 116
MODEM HANGUP cs ............................79, 117
MODEM INIT cs.....................................79, 118
MODEM MAXDIAL n ............................79, 118
MODEM PAUSE n....................................... 119
MODEM PAUSE s ......................................... 80
MODEM PHONENUMBER i n .............80, 119
MODEM PREFIX cs...............................80, 120
MODEM SUFFIX cs...............................80, 120
MODEM WAIT s.....................................80, 121
Natural frequency ................................ 90
NCHANNELS n ......................................72, 121
NET p .........................................................20, 55
Network Option Board....................................... 4
Non-Operating Parameters - User Settable .... 80
Operating Parameters - Channel Specific - User
Settable - Each channel's parameters are set
separately. ch = channel#........................... 73
Operating Parameters - Digital Field Station
Port.............................................................. 77
Operating Parameters - General - User Settable
..................................................................... 71
Operating Parameters - Modem...................... 78
Operating Parameters -System Timing - Global
Positioning System, GPS ............................. 78
Other Header Values controlled by the
Instrument Firmware................................... 81
Other Header Values that can only be displayed
................................................................... 134
Other header variables that have meaning only
within the context of an event header .......... 81
Pager Call Out .................................................. 5
Parameter Commands - Detailed Descriptions83
PASSWORD NEW w...................................... 21
PASSWORD w................................................ 20
PASSWORD w, PW p ..................................... 55
PASSWORD w, PW w .................................. 162
PLL.........................................................141, 162
PW w ............................................................... 21
QUIT ............................................................. 141
QUIT, Q ........................................................ 162
RAM .......................................................142, 162
RD p, RMDIR p .........................................21, 56
Refresh ...................................................... 201
RELEASE ..................................................21, 56

Remote firmware update .....................61

RENAME ofn nfn......................................21, 56
RX fn ..........................................................21, 57
Saving and Loading Parameters ......................70
SDSTREAMS BITMAP c1 c2 .. c6 ...............122
SDSTREAMS BITMAP c1 c2 ..c6 ..................72
SDSTREAMS BUFFER_SIZE n ...........72, 122
SDSTREAMS FORMAT n .....................72, 123
SDSTREAMS SAMPLE_RATE n ..........72, 123
SDSTREAMS TIMEOUT n ....................72, 124
Sensitivity................................................90
Sensor Type and Sensitivity Determination......76
SERIALNUMBER n ...............................80, 124
Short Message Services ......................................5
SITEID cs ................................................80, 125
SMS.....................................................................5
STA/LTA Triggering .........................................82
STACK INIT..........................................142, 163
STACK TEST.........................................142, 163
STATUS .....................................................21, 57
STNID cs..................................................80, 125
STREAM FT...................................................73
STREAM APW s......................................72, 126
STREAM FILTER n ...............................73, 126
STREAM FT st ..............................................127
STREAM MINRUNTIME s....................73, 128
STREAM POSTEVENT s .......................73, 128
STREAM PREEVENT s .........................73, 127
STREAM SPS n.......................................73, 129
STREAM STORAGE pd sd .....................73, 129

STREAM THRESHOLD tn dn ...............73, 130

STREAM VOTERS x v [x v] ...................73, 131
SUMMARY ..................................................... 21
SUMMARY [p] [x].......................................... 58
SYSTEM LOAD.........................................21, 61
SYSTEM LOG ................................................ 62
SYSTEM LOG xx ........................................... 21
SYSTEM RESET .......................................21, 64
TCP/IP........................................................... 10
Terminal Window - Monitor Mode.. 15
The Diagnostic Commands............................ 139
The Diagnostic Commands - Detailed
Description ................................................ 142
The Main Commands....................................... 17
The Main Commands - Detailed Description .. 23
The Terminal Window - Monitor Mode ........... 15
TIME......................................................142, 163
TIME y,m,d,h,m,s ........................................... 21
TIME y,m,d,h,mn,s ......................................... 65
Timed recording ..................................... 87
TRIGGER_OUT time code....................142, 164
TX fn [H] [K] [T] [channel list].................22, 65
Use of Modems .................................................. 1
USERCODE n v.......................................80, 133
UTCOFFSET n .......................................78, 133
VERSION...................................................22, 66
Window, Terminal - Monitor Mode 15
WIPEDISK d..............................................22, 67